Home

Milestone XProtect® Professional 8.1 : Administrator`s Manual

1. 200 ABOUT BACKUP AND RESTORE OF CONFIGURATIONS e eere 200 BACK UP SYSTEM CONFIGURATION esee enne nnne nnn ntn nnnns 200 RESTORE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION e eere eene nnne nnnm nnn tn tnn tntn atn tn ana tn tnn 201 BACK UP AND RESTORE ALARMS CONFIGURATION eeeee enne 201 EXPORT AND IMPORT MANAGEMENT APPLICATION CONFIGURATION 204 IMPORT CHANGES TO CONFIGURATION eee ener nnne nnns 206 RESTORE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FROM A RESTORE POINT eene 206 COMMON WE 208 ABOUT HANDLING DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME eee ener 208 IMPROVE STABILITY WITH 3 GB VIRTUAL MEMORY EENS 208 ABOUT PROTECTING RECORDING DATABASES FROM CORRUPTION sssss1s1es1s1s1n1ns 210 ABOUT VIEWING VERSION AND LICENSE INFORMATION EEN 211 APPLY SAVE CONFIGURATION CHANGES e eene ennt 211 CONFIGURE DEFAULT FILE PATHS eee eere nnntn tnnt tnntntn nns tn tna ta teas 212 MONITOR STORAGE SPACE USAGE eene tnnt eterne nennen nnns 213 VIEW VIDEO FROM CAMERAS IN MANAGEMENT APPLICATION eeeeeeennns 213 GLOSSARY RT erai ettari ii a a aed asd esr corna cnra ed Eon 215 INDEX e s 223 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Copyright trademarks and disclaimer Copyright 2012 Milestone Systems A S Trademarks
2. Add a timer event Timer events are separate events triggered by the type of event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes typically for stopping previously triggered actions Examples e Acamera starts recording based on a hardware input event for example when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds www milestonesys com 129 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a manual event a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To add a timer event select any event you have previously configured click the Add button and specify required properties see Timer event on page 138 XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Tip You can add as many timer events as
3. When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size Tip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in the Smart Client in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS notification 1 First XProtect Professional will attempt to delete archives This will happen if there is less than per camera or the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 10 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose data from the archives being deleted Ultimately if there are no archives to delete XProtect Professional will attempt to resize camera databases This will happen if there is less than 5 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 20 GB plus 1 GB per camera Or the available disk space goes below 75 MB plus 10 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 175 MB 75 MB plus 10 MB for each of the ten cameras www milestonesys com 148 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 The differe
4. MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe or MilestoneXProtectSmart Client_x64 exe for 32 bit and 64 bit versions respectively You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs The httpdocs folder is located under the folder in which your Milestone surveillance software is installed The path is typically C Program Files x86 Milestone Milestone Surveillance httpdocs Smart Client Installer version number bit version All Languages en US For example C Program Files x86 Milestone Milestone Surveillance httpdocs Smart Client Installer 6 0a 32 bit All Languages en US 2 Runasilent installation using one of the following two options a Run with default parameter settings To run a silent installation using the default values for all parameters start a command prompt cmd exe in the directory where the installation program is located and execute following command For XProtect Smart Client installation gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe quiet For XProtect Professional installation gt MilestoneXProtectXProtect Professionallnstaller exe quiet This will perform a quiet installation of the XProtect Smart Client XProtect Professional using default values for parameters such as target directory etc To change the default settings please see next topic b Customize default parameters using an xml argument file as input www milestonesys com 15 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional
5. 86 94 106 125 126 127 136 146 148 189 About archiving audio 128 About archiving locations 126 About archiving schedules 126 131 About archiving to other locations 127 About backup and restore of configurations 178 About database resizing 68 About dedicated input output devices 64 117 About dynamic archive paths 127 About e mail 146 About events and output 109 About handling daylight saving time 185 About hardware devices 62 About input and output 109 www milestonesys com About installing surveillance server software or XProtect Smart Client silently 23 About licenses 30 About logs 142 About master and slave 154 About Matrix recipients 139 About Matrix video sharing 138 About microphones 107 About MIP plug ins 170 177 About Mobile server 15 163 About Mobile Server Manager 15 168 About motion detection and PTZ cameras 69 72 About motion detection settings 68 72 97 About privacy options 35 About protecting recording databases from corruption 95 187 About recording audio 106 About registered services 151 About replacing cameras 34 About saving configuration changes in XProtect Enterprise 8 0 and streamlined XProtect software versions 163 About scheduling 125 About server access 151 About services 68 142 151 162 163 188 About show status 168 169 About SMS 148 223 Index Milestone XProtect
6. Common tasks 185 Configure analytics events in alarms 173 Configure camera specific schedules 28 69 71 132 134 136 137 138 Configure default file paths 126 128 178 188 Configure e mail notifications 119 121 124 137 146 Configure general event handling 110 114 115 122 Configure general scheduling and archiving 28 71 131 134 135 Configure hardware devices 64 65 66 67 100 Configure hardware output on event 109 111 112 114 125 Configure master and slave servers 10 28 154 Configure Matrix 28 139 Configure microphones or speakers 108 225 Index Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Configure motion detection 72 Configure server access 28 59 152 154 Configure SMS notifications 120 121 124 138 148 149 Configure system event and audit logging 144 Configure User Access wizard 28 59 151 156 157 158 171 access summary e 61 Configure user and group rights 28 59 61 63 81 93 96 101 103 112 152 156 158 Configure when cameras should do what 71 Copyright trademarks and disclaimer 9 CSV 191 CSV file format and requirements 45 46 183 D Delete a Mobile server 164 Delete hardware devices 65 72 Detected and verified hardware devices 42 43 Device 191 DirectX 192 Disable information collection 36 Disable or delete cameras 72 DNS 192 Download Manager 17 210 Drive selection 54
7. Event substring www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Specify a name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V 1 Some cameras only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Read only field displaying the port number on which XProtect Professional listens for generic events default is port 1234 The port number can be changed as part of the general event handling configuration see Configure general event handling on page 130 Lets you specify the individual items for which XProtect Professional should look out for when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message expression field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples e Single term User001 when added to the Event message expression field the term will appear as User001 e Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message expression field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as for example User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message expression field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence in order to match your criterion If the terms mu
8. IMPORTANT It is only possible to view alarms based on the Alarms feature in Smart Client 6 0 if you run Smart Client 6 0 in a 32 bit version not in a 64 bit version Add a time profile for Alarms Time Profiles are periods of time used for the Alarms see About alarms on page 192 feature only Tip For all other time scheduling and profiling purposes use the general scheduler of XProtect Professional You can for example create a time profile covering the period from 2 30 PM till 3 30 PM on Mondays and then use the time profile to make sure that a certain alarm definition is only enabled within this period They can be based on one or more single periods of time on one or more recurring periods of time or a combination of single and recurring times Many users will be familiar with the concepts of single and recurring time periods from calendar applications such as the one in Microsoft Outlook Time profiles always apply in the XProtect Professional server s local time To add a time profile for an alarm see Add an alarm on page 195 do the following 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Alarms right click Time Profiles and select Create New Tip The small month overview in the top right corner of the Time Profile Properties window can help you get a quick overview of the time periods covered by the time profile as dates containing specified times are highlighted in bold 2 Inthe calendar
9. Names will consist of hardware device model information followed Hardware model Custom text Dy a dash then a text of your choice specified in the Custom text Device type number field a dash type information and a number Example Axis P1311 Airport Security Camera 1 Names will consist of hardware device model information followed Hardware model Address by a dash then the hardware device address a dash type Example Axis P1311 10 10 123 73 Camera 1 Tip Need other name formats Remember you can change names manually by overwriting all or parts of them in the Name column Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V When done click Finish Advanced The Advanced option scans your network for relevant hardware devices based on your specifications regarding required IP ranges discovery methods drivers and device user names and passwords When using the Advanced option the wizard is divided into these pages e Device discovery IP ranges drivers and authentication see IP ranges drivers and authentication on page 47 e Detected and verified hardware devices on page 49 e Overview and names on page 46 IP ranges drivers and authentication All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited First specify which IP address ranges you want to scan By default the wizard suggests sc
10. Shows how long the Mobile server has been running since it was last stopped Shows current CPU usage on the Mobile server Shows the current bandwidth in use between the Mobile server and the relevant recording server Shows the current bandwidth in use between the mobile device and Mobile server Shows user name s of the Mobile server user s connected to the Mobile server Shows the current relation between the Mobile server and the XProtect Mobile client user in question Is the user connected a state preliminary to servers exchanging keys and encrypting credentials or is he she actually logged in Possible states are Connected and Logged In XProtect Shows the level of bandwidth used by the Mobile server client user in question 188 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Live Streams column Shows the number of live video streams currently open for the XProtect Mobile client user in question Shows the number of playback video streams currently open for the Playback Streams column Mobile server client user in question Note that every time you change a setting in the Mobile server settings you must click the Apply button followed by the Save button Video push If you enable Video push specify the following settings Video push Enable Video push on the Mobile server Specify the number of enabled Video push channels in your Allen XProtect Professional sys
11. Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video from before recording start conditions that is motion or start event are met Usually only some seconds of pre recording is required but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of pre recording corresponding to 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds However if specifying a very long pre recording time you can potentially run into a scenario where your pre recording time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving see About archiving on page 143 times That can be problematic since pre recording does not work well during archiving Seconds of pre recording You can store recordings from periods following detected motion Post recording and or stop events Select check box to enable this feature Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring column Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video from after recording stop conditions that is motion or stop event are met Usually only some seconds of post recording is required but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of post recording Seconds of post recording corresponding to 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds However if specifying a very long post recording time you can potentially run into a scenario where your post recording time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving times That can be problematic since post recording does not work well during archiving The template can help you conf
12. Use of the SMS notification feature requires that an external Siemens TC 35 GSM modem has been attached to a serial port a k a COM port on the XProtect Professional server Siemens TC 35 is a dual band EGSM900 GSM1800 modem Verify that the modem is compatible with mobile phone networks where you are going to use it with XProtect Professional Configure SMS notifications To configure SMS notifications do the following 1 In the Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click SMS and select Properties 2 Enable the use of SMS by selecting the Enable SMS check box 3 Specify required properties see SMS properties on page 168 Tip You can test your SMS notification configuration by clicking the Test button this will send a test SMS to the specified recipient Note that you must stop the Recording Server service see Start and stop services on page 184 while you perform the test remember to start the service again afterwards 4 XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required 5 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar When you
13. activated and licensed instead The total number of purchased device channels corresponds to the total number of cameras that can run on the surveillance system simultaneously If you remove a camera from a recording server you also free a license When you replace a camera you must use the Management Application Replace Hardware Device wizard see About the Replace Hardware Device wizard on page 71 to map all relevant databases of cameras microphones inputs outputs etc Remember to activate the license once you are finished www milestonesys com 39 Licenses Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Application settings About privacy options To help Milestone improve the usability and customer experience of XProtect Professional you were presented with the option Sign me up for the Customer Experience Improvement Program during the installation of XProtect Professional e f you declined no software contributing statistical information is included in your XProtect Professional installation e f you accepted a cookie issuing a Global Unique IDentifier GUID is included as part of your XProtect Professional installation As a result XProtect Professional anonymously collects relevant information about your installation and operation of XProtect Professional at regular intervals See the following for a detailed list of what is collected Also if you accepted a setting makes it possible to turn the
14. keyframes when the stop event occurs 97 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Click the Open button to configure detailed and or camera specific Camera settings such as event notification PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas for the selected camera Select All Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Clear All Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Set selected template value on Apply only a selected value from the template to selected cameras selected cameras Tip To select more than one value press CTRL while selecting Set all template values on saleciod camaras Apply all values from the template to selected cameras Audio recording When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras you can determine whether audio should be recorded or not Your choice applies for all cameras on your XProtect Professional system Always Always record audio on all applicable cameras Never record audio on any cameras Note that even though audio is Never never recorded it is still be possible to listen to live audio in the Smart Client If you record audio it is important that you note the following e Audio recording affects video storage capacity Audio is recorded to the associated camera s database Therefore it is important to bear in mind that the databas
15. make sure that File is selected in the Backup media list Click Add In the Locate Backup File dialog locate and select your backup file VIDEOOSDB bak Then click OK The path to your backup file is now listed in the Specify Backup dialog Back on the Restore Database dialog s General page your backup is now listed under Select the backup sets to restore Make sure you select the backup by selecting the check box in the Restore column Now go to the Restore Database dialog s Options page and select Overwrite the existing database Leave the other options as they are and then click OK to begin the restoration When the restore is finished you will see a confirmation Tip If you get an error message telling you that the database is in use try exiting Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express completely then repeat steps 1 9 Exit Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express Step 5 Restarting the Event Server service During the restore process the Event Server service was stopped to prevent configuration changes being made until you were done Remember to start the service again 1 On your surveillance system server click Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services www milestonesys com 203 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 2 Right click the Event Server click Start What is the SQL Server Express transaction log and why does
16. or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder 164 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 A new log file is created for each day with audit logging enabled and client user activity A log file older than the number of days specified in the field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stored for seven days To specify another number of days Days to log max 9999 simply overwrite the value in the field The current day s activity is always logged provided audit logging is enabled and there is user activity Therefore if you specify 1 you will keep one day plus the current day s activity Note that if you specify 0 zero audit log files will be kept indefinitely disk space permitting Minimum number of seconds between logged events Specifying a Minimum logging interval high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce In sequence timespan the size of the audit log Default is 60 seconds Number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be considered to be within the same sequence Specifying a high number of seconds may help limit the number of viewed sequences logged and thus reduce the size of the audit log Default is ten seconds E mail About e mail With e mail notifications you can instantly get notified when your surveillance system requires attention XProtect Professional can automatically send e ma
17. see About services on page 183 which handles clients access to the surveillance system About registered services Registered services displays the services installed to and running on your XProtect Professional system It displays the following information about the individual services Enabled Indicates if the relevant service is enabled Name The name of the service Description A description of the service Addresses The inside and outside addresses used by the service You can change the inside and outside addresses for a service To do this you click the Edit button and then enter the relevant inside and or outside addresses Note that not all services can be edited You can delete a service registration from the system by clicking the Delete button You are prompted for confirmation before the service is deleted Configure server access 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Server Access and select Properties 2 Specify required properties for Server Access on page 172 Local IP Ranges on page 173 and Language Support amp XML Encoding see Language support and XML encoding on page 173 XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for
18. see Add user groups on page 178 before you add users You cannot add existing users to groups www milestonesys com 177 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 You can add Windows users in two ways One is through the Configure User Access wizard on page 68 the other is described here The users you want to add must have been defined as local PC users on the server Simple file sharing must be disabled on the server To disable simple file sharing right click Windows Start button and select Explore In the window that opens select the Tools menu then select Folder Options then the View tab Scroll to the bottom of the tab s Advanced Settings list and make sure that the Use simple files sharing check box is cleared When ready click OK and close the window 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Users and select Add New Windows User This will open the Select Users or Groups dialog Note that you can only make selections from the local computer even if you click the Locations button 2 Inthe Enter the object names to select box type the required user name s then use the Check Names feature to verify it If you type several user names separate each name with a semicolon Example Brian Hannah Karen Wayne 3 When done click OK 4 Specify General Access on page 180 and Camera Access on page 181 prope
19. 189 Recording and archiving settings 56 Recording and storage properties 73 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Recording Server Manager 16 209 Recording Server service 196 Register SLC 32 Regular frame rate properties 82 Removal 26 Remove the current version 26 Rename a Mobile server 164 Replace hardware devices 65 Restore point 196 Restore system configuration 179 Restore system configuration from a restore point 178 183 188 S Scheduling all cameras 131 134 Scheduling and archiving 125 Scheduling options 50 131 135 136 137 SCS 196 SDK 196 Server access 22 151 152 Server access properties 152 Server access settings 60 Server status 166 Servers 163 Services 162 Show or hide microphone and or speaker 107 108 Show edit port numbers 168 170 SIM 196 229 Index Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 SLC 196 SMS 148 196 SMS notification 120 121 124 134 136 138 149 150 SMS properties 136 138 149 SMTP 196 Sound settings 175 176 Speaker properties 107 108 Speakers 107 Speedup 79 84 85 90 137 Speedup frame rate properties 83 Start and stop services 57 58 64 65 97 101 103 106 149 150 162 163 183 189 190 Start stop and restart Mobile service 168 170 Storage capacity required for archiving 128 Storage information 87 Subnet 196 T TCP 196 T
20. Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 PTZ type Import Refresh Add New Set New Position www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Your configuration options depend on the type of PTZ camera in question e Type 1 stored on server You define preset positions by moving the camera using the controls see Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions on page 83 in the upper half of the window then storing each required position on the XProtect Professional server You can define up to 260 preset positions this way e Type 2 imported from camera You import preset positions which have previously been defined and stored on the PTZ camera itself through the camera s own configuration interface The number of allowed preset positions depends on the PTZ camera and driver used e Type 3 stored on camera You define preset positions by moving the camera with the controls see Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions on page 83 in the upper half of the window then storing each required position in the camera s own memory You can define up to 260 preset positions this way If preset positions have already been defined for the camera you can simply import them for use with XProtect Professional Only available when you have selected PTZ type 2 or 3 Lets you import already defined preset positions from the camera s memory for use with XProtect Professional If you have already imported p
21. Driver 192 DST 192 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Dual stream 192 DVR 192 Dynamic path selection 47 68 75 95 127 189 E Edit certificate 168 169 E mail 146 E mail notification 119 121 124 134 136 137 146 147 E mail properties 137 146 Enable XProtect Central 150 Event notification 95 Event Server 192 Event Server settings 37 Events and output 109 Events and output properties 117 Exclude regions 58 72 Export 167 Export and import management application configuration 47 178 181 183 Express 39 F Fill in edit surveillance server credentials 168 170 Fisheye 64 99 100 192 FPS 192 Frame rate 192 Frame rate MJPEG 81 137 Frame Rate MPEG 84 226 Index Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 FTP 192 G General 51 53 77 88 92 97 178 General access 157 158 159 161 General event properties 116 General scheduling properties 133 Generate alarms based on analytics events 113 Generic event 113 121 Generic events 192 Get your system up and running 23 27 Getting started 27 GOP 192 Grace period 192 Group information 159 GSM 192 GUID 193 H H 264 193 Hardware detection and verification 40 Hardware device 193 Hardware devices 62 Hardware input event 111 112 113 119 Hardware name and video channels 65 Hardware output 120 Hardware prope
22. Professional 8 1 About speakers 107 About the Replace Hardware Device wizard 30 34 62 65 67 About upgrading 25 About users 156 About video and recording configuration 27 68 70 73 75 76 81 84 86 88 89 91 92 93 95 96 97 100 107 108 127 132 136 About Video push 163 164 About viewing version and license information 188 About XProtect Central 150 About XProtect Mobile client 15 163 About XProtect Smart Client 12 About XProtect Web Client 15 163 Access logs and exports 168 169 Access XProtect Web Client 15 168 Activate License Offline 33 Activate License Online 32 Add a generic event 111 113 Add a hardware input event 111 119 Add a hardware output 96 109 111 112 114 120 Add a manual event 111 112 120 171 174 Add a time profile for Alarms 171 172 174 176 Add a timer event 111 113 120 121 125 Add a Video push channel 164 167 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Add a Video push channel as a hardware device 164 165 Add an alarm 171 172 173 Add an analytics event 111 117 Add basic users 28 152 156 157 158 159 160 161 Add hardware devices settings 165 Add Hardware Devices wizard Import from CSV File example of CSV file 45 Add user groups 28 59 152 156 157 158 159 160 161 Add Windows users 156 157 158 159 160 161 Add edit a Mobile server 164
23. Professional automatically archives see About archiving on page 143 recordings if a camera s database becomes full in earlier versions this was an option configured individually for each camera Archiving Times Send e mail on archiving failure Send SMS on archiving failure www milestonesys com Specify when you want XProtect Professional to automatically move recordings to your archiving path s You can specify up to 24 archiving times per day with minimum one hour between each one Select the hour minute and second values and click the up and down buttons to increase or decrease values or simply overwrite the selected value and then click Add The more you expect to record the more often you should archive If selected XProtect Professional will automatically send an e mail to selected recipients if archiving fails This requires that the e mail notification on page 156 feature is enabled Recipients are defined as part of the e mail notification properties If selected XProtect Professional will automatically send an SMS mobile phone text message to selected recipients if archiving fails This requires that the SMS notification on page 156 feature is enabled Recipients are defined as part of the SMS notification properties see SMS properties on page 168 154 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Camera specific scheduling properties Properties in t
24. Professional server If you add more than 64 should the Management Application warn you or not Note that selectable behavior may vary depending on the type of action 3 Click OK 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Tip You can quickly restore default settings by clicking the button below the behavior list Change language The Management Application is available in several languages To change the language of the Management Application www milestonesys com 41 Application settings Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 1 Goto the Management Application s menu bar and select Application Settings and then Application Behavior In the dialog click Language This will display a drop down list that contains the available languages for the Management Application 2 Select the relevant language that you want to switch to and then click OK The Management Application must be restarted for the change of language to take effect Analytics events settings To change Analytic Events see Overview of events and output on page 125 settings in the Management Application go to the Management Application s menu bar and select Application Settings and then Application Behavior In the dialog click Analytics Events Settings and fill in the properties see Analytics event settings for alarms properties on page 42 Analytics ev
25. Recording Bee Server service was last started A Indicates the number of times the camera has been offline due to Offline an error Download Manager The Download Manager lets you manage which XProtect Professional related features your organization s users can access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server You access the Download Manager from Windows Start menu Select All Programs gt Milestone XProtect Download Manager gt Download Manager Examples of user accessible features e The Smart Client With a regular Internet Explorer browser users connect to the surveillance server where they are presented with a welcome page From the welcome page users download the Smart Client software and install it on their computers e Language packs which let users add additional language versions to their existing Smart Clients Users download such language packs from the welcome page e Various plug ins Downloading such plug ins can be relevant for users if your organization uses add on products with the XProtect Professional system The welcome page The welcome page has links to downloads of various features It is available in a number of languages users select their required language from a menu in the top right corner of the welcome page To view the welcome page simply open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the following address http surveillance server IP address or h
26. SMS notification e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in green rep iss PTZ patrolling e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in red e f use of one patrolling profile is followed immediately by use of another run your mouse pointer over the red bar to see which patrolling profile applies when XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of www milestonesys com 80 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required 1 In the Schedule Profiles list select Add new 2 In the Add Profile dialog enter a name for the profile Names must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V 2 3 In the top right corner of the dialog select Set camera to start stop on time to base subsequent settings on periods of time or Set camera to start stop on event to base subsequent settings on events within periods of time Tip You can combine the two so you may return to this step in order to toggle between the two options 4 n the calendar section place your mouse pointer at a required start point then hold down the left mou
27. Software XProtect Smart Client www milestonesys com e Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Server 2008 R1 R2 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Intel Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher CoreTM 2 recommended Minimum 2 GB 4 GB or more recommended Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit colors E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 1 GB free hard disk space available excluding space needed for recordings e Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework e DirectX 9 0 or newer e Windows Help WinHIp32 exe All can be downloaded from http www microsoft com downloads 22 Before you start Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Server 2008 R1 R2 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Operating system e Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit e Windows 7 Ultima
28. Tip If the computer that runs the Management Application has internet access use online activation You cannot activate more licenses than you have bought If you have added more cameras than you have licenses for you must buy additional licenses before you can activate them Tip To get an overview of your licenses go to the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration select Hardware Devices and view your Hardware Device Summary table In the following examples it is assumed that XProtect Professional is installed with a temporary license lic file About activating licenses after grace period If the grace period is exceeded before activation all cameras that are not activated within the given period become unavailable and cannot send data to the surveillance system If you exceed the grace period before you activate a license the license is not lost You can activate the license as usual Configuration added cameras and other settings are not removed from the Management Application if a license is activated too late Register SLC If you do not have your SLC contact your vendor 1 Goto the Milestone website at www milestonesys com and click the Software registration link in the menu 2 Login to the Software Registration Service Center with your user name e mail address and password Tip If you have not used the Software Registration Service Center before click thine New to the syst
29. Windows Server 2003 and installation fails installing a Microsoft hotfix might solve the issue and allow you to complete your XProtect Professional installation The Microsoft hotfix can be downloaded here http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx Familyid 8EFFE1 D9 7224 4586 BE2B 42C9AE5B9071 amp displaylang en http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx Familyld 8EFFE 1 D9 7224 4586 BE2B 42C9AE5B9071 amp displaylang en When you have installed the hotfix restart the XProtect Professional installation You can now begin to configure your XProtect Professional through its Management Application See more under Get your system up and running on page 31 www milestonesys com 26 Install and upgrade Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Install silently 1 Locate the Smart Client installation program exe file MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe or MilestoneXProtectSmart Client x64 exe for 32 bit and 64 bit versions respectively You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs The httpdocs folder is located under the folder in which your Milestone surveillance software is installed The path is typically C Program Files x86 MilestoneMilestone Surveillance httpdocs Smart Client Installer version number bit version All Languages en US For example C Program Files x86 Milestone Milestone Surveillance httpdocs Smart Client Installer 6 0a 32 bit All Languag
30. XProtect Professional creates a new database and continues archiving in this new database You can work with and view both this new database and the old one like any other databases www milestonesys com 143 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 About archiving locations The default archiving folder see Configure default file paths on page 212 C MediaDatabase is located on the XProtect Professional server You can change the default archiving folder to any other location locally or select a location on a network drive to use as the default archiving folder In the archiving folder separate subfolders for storing archives for each camera are automatically created These subfolders are named after the MAC address of the hardware device to which the camera is connected Because you can keep archives spanning many days of recordings and archiving may take place several times per day further subfolders named with the archiving date and time are also automatically created The subfolders are named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress VideoEncoderChannel DateAndTime If the video encoder does not have several channels the video encoder channel will always be 1 example 00408c51e181 1 Example an archiving at 23 15 on 31st December 2012 for a camera with the MAC address 00408c51e181 attached to channel 2 would be stored C MediaDatabase Arch
31. a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted The more you drag the slider to the left the more of the preview image becomes highlighted This is because with a high sensitivity even the slightest change in a pixel will be regarded as motion As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 256 in the field next to the slider to control the sensitivity setting Adjust the Motion slider so that motion detection is only triggered by the required level of motion The selected motion level is indicated by the black vertical line in the Level bar above the sliders The black vertical line serves as a threshold When motion is above to the right of the selected level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive motion detection Alternatively specify a value between 0 and 10000 in the field on the left to control the motion setting The more you drag the slider to the left the more positive motion detections you see because less change will be needed to trigger a positive motion detection The number of positive motion detections may also affect the amount of video you record the amount of notifications you receive etc If you want motion detection to take place only on keyframes of the video stream to reduce the system resources used on motion detection select Keyframe only 111 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professiona
32. all cameras in the list click the Select All button Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Lets you apply the value from the template to selected cameras 62 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Drive selection Specify which drives you want to store cameras recordings on You can specify separate drives paths for recording and archiving see About archiving on page 143 All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Drive Letter representing the drive in question for example C Select what you want to use the drive for Not in use Do not use the drive Recording Only available if the drive is a local drive on the XProtect Professional server Network drives cannot be used for recording Use the drive for storing recordings in the regular database for XProtect Professional Purpose Archiving Use the drive for archiving For archiving it is generally a good idea to use a drive which has plenty of space With dynamic path selection for archives see description in the following you do not have to worry about drive space Rec amp Archiving Only available if the drive is a local drive on the XProtect Professional server Network drives cannot be used for recording Use the drive for storing recordings in the regular database for XP
33. also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 Enable Show grid Include All Exclude All Sensitivity Motion Keyframe Only www milestonesys com Lets you enable or disable see About motion detection settings on page 78 the built in motion detection Lets you toggle the grid on and off Toggling the grid off may provide a less obscured view of the preview image selection of areas which should be excluded from motion detection takes place the same way as when the grid is visible When on the preview image will be divided into small sections by a grid To define areas which should be excluded from motion detection drag the mouse over the areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in blue Lets you quickly select all grid sections in the preview image This can be useful if you want to exclude motion detection in most areas of the image in which case you can simply clear the few sections in which you do not want to exclude motion detection Lets you quickly clear all grid sections in the preview image Determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded as motion With a high sensitivity very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in green in the preview image Select
34. and cameras do not send data to the surveillance system We therefore recommend that you activate your licenses see About activating licenses on page 35 before you make final adjustments to your system and its devices If you want to add or have already added more device channels than you currently have licenses for you must buy additional licenses before the cameras can send data to your XProtect Professional System To get additional licenses for XProtect Professional contact your vendor or visit www milestonesys com to log into the software registration service center When your license file lic is updated you can activate your licenses See Manage licenses for more information on activating Tip If short of licenses until you get additional ones you can disable some less important cameras to allow some of the new cameras to run instead To disable or enable a camera expand Hardware Devices in the Management Application s navigation pane Then select the relevant hardware device right click the required camera and then select Enable or Disable Which devices require a license About replacing cameras You can replace a camera that is licensed in XProtect Professional and have the new camera activated and licensed instead The total number of purchased device channels corresponds to the total number of cameras that can run on the surveillance system simultaneously If you remove a camera from a recording server you also
35. and full stops Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in SMS notifications Tip While you write the counter below the Message field indicates how many characters you have left to use Minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each SMS notification per camera This interval only applies for SMS notification generated by detected motion or database related events SMS notification generated by other types of events will still be sent out whenever the events occur Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each motion or database related SMS notification per camera even if motion or database events are detected in between If specifying 0 SMS notifications will be sent each time motion or database events are detected potentially resulting in a very large number of SMS notifications being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider cameras motion detection see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 sensitivity settings Lets you test your SMS notification configuration by sending a test SMS to the specified recipient Note that you must stop the Recording Server service see Start and stop services on page 184 while you perform the test remember to start the service again afterwards If selected SMS notifications will not be sent if XProtect Professional loses contact with a camera Otherwi
36. any of these special characters lt gt amp V Speaker name Microphones About microphones Microphones are attached to hardware devices and therefore typically physically located next to cameras They can typically record what people near a camera are saying Operators with the necessary rights can then listen to these recordings through their Smart Clients provided the computer running the Smart Client has speakers attached www milestonesys com 122 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 When you manage microphones in XProtect Professional you can always manage the microphones attached to cameras not microphones attached to Smart Client operators computers If you have added more microphones and speakers to your XProtect Professional system than you need you can hide the ones you do not need by right clicking the relevant microphone and or speaker and select Hide If you need the hidden microphone again you can right click the overall microphone and or speaker icon and select Show Hidden Items Configure microphones or speakers 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Hardware Devices and expand the hardware device to which the relevant microphones or speakers is attached 2 Right click the required microphones or speakers and select Properties 3 Specify properties see Speaker properties on page 122 as re
37. be different in order to get the best result Resolution Select the resolution of the camera FPS Select the camera s live frame rate per second FPS Why are there three different places where can configure frame rates for video The first Live frame rate is for the regular recording stream The second Live frame rate is for when speeding up recordings in connection with motion detection or similar And the third FPS is for the additional stream used for live viewing If the camera uses the MPEG video format With MPEG you can define frame rate and other settings Frame rate for viewing live and recorded video from the camera Frame rate per second P Select number of frames per second www milestonesys com 91 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Record keyframes only Record all frames on motion Record all frames on event Start Event Stop Event Dual stream Administrator s Manual Keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames record only pixels that change This helps greatly reducing the size of MPEG files Select the check box if you only want to record keyframes Note that you can specify exceptions if motion is detected or events occur see the following Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record keyframes only Select this check box to record all frames when motion is detected Two seconds a
38. bear in mind the amount of runtime you will require the UPS to be able to provide if the power fails saving open files and shutting down an operating system properly may take several minutes Windows Task Manager Be careful when ending processes When working in Windows Task Manager be careful not to end any processes which affect the surveillance system If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the Windows Task Manager the process will not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is terminated This may lead to corrupt camera databases Windows Task Manager will typically display a warning if you attempt to end a process Unless you are absolutely sure that ending the process will not affect the surveillance system click No when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process Hard disk failure Protect your drives About viewing version and license information Knowing the exact version of your XProtect Professional system may be relevant if you require support or want to upgrade your system It may also be relevant for you to know your license information and what contact details Milestone has registered about your organization If you have purchased a Software Upgrade Plan SUP information about the expiration date of the SUP may also be important you to know To view such information select About in the Management Application Help menu If you need to upda
39. because half of the database s records is used for storing audio Consequently the database runs full sooner and automatic archiving takes place more often than if you were only recording video o Example If you use MJPEG audio is stored in one record for every JPEG for as long as the audio block size does not exceed the time between the JPEGs In extreme cases this reduces the database s video storage capacity to half its capacity because half of the database s records is used for storing audio If you use very high frame rates which means less time between each JPEG a smaller portion of the database is used for storing audio records and consequently a larger portion is available for storing video The result is that the database runs full sooner and automatic archiving takes place more often than if you were only recording video The above examples are simplified The exact available video storage capacity also depends on GOP JPEG and audio kilobyte size www milestonesys com 121 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Speakers About speakers Speakers are attached to devices and therefore also typically physically located next to cameras They can typically transmit information to people near a camera Operators with the necessary rights can talk through such speakers using their Smart Clients provided the computer running the Smart Client has a microphone attached Example
40. become unavailable for selection 4 Foreach selected type of input select required properties see Hardware input event on page 135 When ready click OK or click the Add button to add a timer event on page 129 to the event you have just created 5 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Add a hardware output With hardware output you can add external output units such as lights sirens door openers etc to your XProtect Professional system Once added output can be activated automatically by events or detected motion or manually by client users www milestonesys com 127 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Before you specify output verify that sensor operation is recognized by the hardware device with which you are going to use the output Most hardware devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the release notes to verify that output controlled operation is supported for the hardware device and firmware used To add a hardware output event do the following 1 In the Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration then expand Events and Output Right click Hardware Output and select Add New Output 2 In the Hardware Output Properties window s list of hardware devices select the required hardware device and
41. camera and the database containing recordings from the camera attached to the old hardware device For multi camera devices such as video encoders you must decide what to do for each video channel on the new hardware device The table in the left side of the wizard page lists available video channels on the new hardware device For a regular single camera hardware device there will only be one video channel For video encoders there will typically be several video channels 1 Foreach video channel use the table s Inherit column to select which camera from the old hardware device should be inherited by the new hardware device 2 Then decide what to do with camera databases You have three options o Inherit existing database s The cameras you selected to be inherited by the new hardware device will inherit camera names recordings databases as well as any archives from the old hardware device Databases and archives see About archiving on page 143 will be renamed to reflect the new hardware device s MAC address and video channels The rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 of users with access to the inherited cameras are automatically updated so they can view both old and new recordings Users will basically not notice the hardware device replacement since camera names will remain the same www milestonesys com 72 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 o Delete
42. clients may get the following error message Application is not able to start because two or more cameras are using the same name or ID Instead export your configuration as a clone When you export as a clone the export takes into account the fact that you will not use the www milestonesys com 204 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 exact same physical cameras etc even though your new system may otherwise be identical to your existing one What is the difference between this Management Application configuration backup and the system configuration backup done from the Milestone Surveillance folder Those are two different things The backup described here is limited to a backup of the Management Application configuration The type of system configuration backup done from the Milestone Surveillance folder is a backup of your entire surveillance system setup including among other things log files event configuration restore points view groups and Management Application and Smart Client configuration When you install the new version of XProtect Professional it inherits the configuration from your previous version We recommend that you make regular backups of your server configuration as a disaster recovery measure You should also do this when you upgrade your server While it is rare that you lose your configuration cameras schedules views etc it can happen under
43. collection of information off or on as needed What information is collected from XProtect Professional No personal information about the equipment PC XProtect Professional is installed on or about any of the recordings you make This is collected e The country where the software is installed e Hardware platform information such as operating system version Microsoft NET framework version CPU type and memory size e XProtect Professional version information e Information about the number and type of hardware devices cameras used with XProtect Professional e Information on which XProtect Professional features are used and how often they are used e Information about which XProtect Professional menus and buttons are activated and how often they are used e Execution time for specific operations in your XProtect Professional installation e Error reports and exceptions generated by your XProtect Professional installation When is information collected from XProtect Professional Information is only collected when the Management Application or Smart Client is active You can disable the automatic collection of information by either removing XProtect Professional or by disabling it using the Management Application see earlier for details on how www milestonesys com 40 Application settings Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 How does Milestone protect collected information Milestone
44. configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 means that much configuration needed in XProtect Central has become redundant with the introduction of alarms Client wise the Alarms feature uses the XProtect Smart Client However the features Alarms Time Profiles for Alarms and General Settings must still be configured in the Management Application and are very similar to XProtect Central Can I reuse old alarm and map definitions from XProtect Central No you will have to redefine your alarms and maps definitions in the Alarms feature Does the Alarms feature cover the same functionality as XProtect Analytics Generic VA Yes to a large extent since what was before a plug in to XProtect Analytics is now an integrated part of the Alarms feature and covers the same functionality See also Does Alarms cover the same functionality as XProtect Central FAQ earlier Tip You can even use manual events for triggering alarms and if required the same event can be used to trigger several different alarms About alarms in the Smart Client To ease overview delegation and handling of alarms these will appear in the Smart Client alarm list where it is possible to view and manage these reassign change status comment and similar They can if relevant be integrated with map functionality The Alarms feature is a powerful monitoring tool providing instant overview of alarms and possible technical problems
45. configure SMS alerts also consider the SMS notification schedules see SMS notification on page 156 configured for each camera SMS properties With SMS notifications see Configure SMS notifications on page 168 you can instantly get notified when your surveillance system requires attention www milestonesys com 168 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Enable SMS GSM modem connected to SIM card PIN code SIM card PUK code SMS central phone number Recipient phone number Message Time between motion and database related SMSs per camera Test Do not send SMS on camera failures www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Enables the use of SMS notifications allowing you to specify further properties Select port connecting the XProtect Professional server to the GSM modem Specify PIN code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem Specify PUK code that is unlocking code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem Specify the number of the SMS central to which the GSM modem should connect in order to send SMS notifications Specify the number of the mobile telephone to which SMS alerts should be sent It is only possible to send SMS notifications to a single telephone number Specify required message text for the SMS notification Message text must be no longer that 160 characters and must only contain the following characters a z A Z 0 9 as well as commas
46. consider the e mail notification schedules see E mail notification on page 156 configured for each camera E mail properties With e mail notifications see Configure e mail notifications on page 165 you and your colleagues can instantly get notified when your surveillance system requires attention Recipient s Test Subject text Message text Include Image www milestonesys com Specify the e mail addresses to which e mail notifications should be sent If specifying more than one e mail address separate the e mail addresses with semicolons example aa aa aa bb bb bb cc cc cc Sends a test e mail to the specified recipients If Include Image is selected the test e mail will have a still test JPEG image attached Enter required subject text for e mail notifications Enter required message text for e mail notifications Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in e mail notifications Select check box to include still images in e mail notifications When selected a still JPEG image from the time the triggering event occurred will be attached to each e mail notification 166 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Do not send e mail on camera failures Time between motion and database related e mails per camera Sender e mail address Outgoing mail SMTP server name Server requires login User name Password www
47. create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for the individual user Note that if you add a user as a Windows user this will provide better security If you want to include users in groups make sure you add required groups see Add user groups on page 178 before you add users You cannot add existing users to groups You can add basic users in two ways One is through the Configure User Access wizard on page 68 the other is described here 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Users and select Add New Basic User 2 Specify a user name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V 2 Then specify a password and repeat it to be sure you have specified it correctly 3 Click OK 4 Specify General Access on page 180 and Camera Access on page 181 properties These properties will determine the rights of the user 5 Click OK 6 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Add Windows users When you add Windows users you import users defined locally on the server and authenticate them based on their Windows login This generally provides better security than the basic user concept and is the recommended method If you want to include users in groups make sure you add required groups
48. devices support device discovery verify that they are working and connected to the same part of the network as the XProtect Professional server then click the Rescan button If hardware devices detected in the first scan cannot be detected in the second scan the wizard will still remember them 3 In the User name column select or type the user name required to access the administrator account on each hardware device The administrator account gives full access and XProtect Professional is going to need that for each hardware device Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer s default user names for their hardware devices If that is the case in your organization select default do not type a manufacturer s default user name as this can be a source of error trust that XProtect Professional will know the manufacturer s default user name Other typical user names such as admin or root are also selectable from the list If requiring a user name which is not on the list simply type the required user name Tip User names you type yourself will subsequently be added to the list so you can easily select them later www milestonesys com 45 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 4 In the Password column specify the password required to access the administrator account on each hardware device The administrator account gives full access and XProtect Professional is going to need that for
49. field blank Tip If you are in doubt about which user name password to use Password ask yourself Have previously used a web page to connect to the hardware device and view video While did this was also able to configure camera settings such as resolution etc If you can answer yes to both questions you were probably using the hardware device s administrator account in which case you will also know the user name password If still in doubt look in the XProtect Device Pack release notes Driver to use with the hardware device If the Auto detect option is Hardware Driver selected the hardware the XProtect Professional can find the relevant driver automatically www milestonesys com 50 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Indicates whether access to the hardware device has been verified Hardware devices for which you have specified correct address port user name and password will be verified immediately if you EI use the auto detect method If you select drivers manually access Verified will be verified once you click Next Tip To save time when using the Auto detect feature you can enter information about other devices while the auto detection is in progress Import from CSV file This option lets you import data about hardware devices and cameras as comma separated values CSV see CSV file format and requirements on page 52 from a file a highly effective method if settin
50. first install the required features on the surveillance system server and then use the Download Manager to fine tune which features you want available on the various versions of the welcome page Installing new features on the server 1 If the Download Manager is open close it before installing new features on the server www milestonesys com 20 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 2 Download the relevant installation file s to to C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance relevant subfolder often Installers or relevant language folder Double click the required installation exe file 3 When a new feature has been installed on the surveillance system server you will see a confirmation dialog If required you can open the Download Manager from the dialog Making new features available through the Download Manager When you have installed new features by default they will be selected in the Download Manager and immediately be available to users via the welcome page You can always show or hide features on the welcome page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the tree structure Tip You can change the sequence in which features and languages are displayed on the welcome page by simply dragging items and dropping them in the required position Hiding and removing features You can remove features in several ways e You can hide features from the welcome page by clearing
51. following Record on is used recording will stop immediately after the last motion is detected e Event Select this to record video when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of recording on event requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields e Motion Detection amp Event Select this to record video in which motion is detected or when an event occurs and until another event occurs Remember to select start and stop events in the neighboring columns You can store recordings from periods preceding detected motion and or start events Select check box to enable this feature Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring column How does pre and post recording work XProtect Professional receives video in a continuous stream from the camera whenever Pre recording the camera is enabled and scheduled to be online This is what lets you view live video but it also means that XProtect Professional can easily store received video for a number of seconds in its memory a k a buffering If it turns out that the buffered video is needed for pre or post recording it is automatically appended to the recording If not it is simply discarded www milestonesys com 59 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1
52. from Event A occurs until Event B occurs Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in yellow The two options can be combined overlap in time but they cannot Is it possible to view live and even record video from a camera outside its online recording schedule Yes you select the Start cameras on client requests see Scheduling options on page 153 and if needed the Enable recording when started on client request see Scheduling options on page 153 options when setting up your scheduling properties for the camera in question www milestonesys com 155 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Speedup Speedup may also take place based on events but that is configured elsewhere See Frame rate MJPEG General recording and storage properties see Frame rate MJPEG on page 93 and Video Camera specific properties see Video on page 101 For specific MJPEG cameras specify speedup periods Before you can define this type of schedule speedup must be enabled see Frame rate MJPEG on page 93 You specify a camera s Speedup speedup periods by creating schedule profiles based on periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in olive green Loa usd E mail notification When you configure scheduling see Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 for specific cameras you can specify e mail notification see Configure e mail notifications on pa
53. from the list verify that the missing hardware devices are working and that they are located within the specified IP address ranges then click the Rescan button If hardware devices detected in the first scan cannot be detected in the second scan the wizard will still remember them 3 For all detected hardware devices XProtect Professional has verified that user names passwords are correct and marked each device in the Verified column If any hardware devices could not be verified make sure you have specified the correct user names passwords 4 Click Next The next wizard page provides you with an overview where you can select names for cameras etc Manual The Manual option lets you specify details about each hardware device separately A good choice if you only want to add a few hardware devices and you know their IP addresses required user names and passwords etc When using the Manual option the wizard is divided into these pages e Hardware device information driver selection and verification see Information driver selection and verification on page 50 e Overview and names on page 46 www milestonesys com 49 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Information driver selection and verification Specify information about each hardware device you want to add All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Indicates tha
54. into a scenario where your pre recording time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving see About archiving on page 143 times That can be problematic since pre recording does not work well during archiving You can store recordings from periods following detected motion and or stop events Select check box to enable this feature Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring column Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video from after recording stop conditions that is motion or stop event are met Usually only some seconds of post recording is required but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of post recording corresponding to 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds However if specifying a very long post recording time you can potentially run into a scenario where your post recording time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving times That can be problematic since post recording does not work well during archiving The template can help you configure similar properties quickly For example if you have 20 cameras and you want a particular frame rate on all of them you can simply enter it once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras Apply Template Select All Clear All Apply template on selected cameras www milestonesys com Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select
55. it need to be flushed Each time a change in the XProtect Professional alarm data occurs the SQL Server will log the change in its transaction log The transaction log is essentially a security feature that makes it possible to roll back and undo changes to the SQL Server Express database The SQL Server by default stores its transaction log indefinitely and therefore the transaction log will over time build up more and more entries The SQL Server s transaction log is by default located on the system drive and if the transaction log just grows and grows it may in the end prevent Windows from running properly Flushing the SQL Server s transaction log from time to time is therefore a good idea flushing it does not in itself make the transaction log file smaller but it prevents it from growing out of control XProtect Professional does not however automatically flush the SQL Server s transaction log at specific intervals This is because users have different needs Some want to be able to undo changes for a very long time others do not care what would suit one organization s needs could be problematic for others You can do several things on the SQL Server itself to keep the size of the transaction log down including truncating and or shrinking the transaction log for numerous articles on this topic go to support microsoft com see hitp support microsoft com http support microsoft com and search for SQL Server transaction log Howeve
56. itself guarantee that the system matches the exact needs of your organization To make the system match the needs of your organization it is highly recommended that you monitor and adjust the system once it is running For example it is often a good idea to spend time on testing and adjusting the motion detection sensitivity settings for individual cameras under different physical conditions day night windy calm etc Do this once the system is running The setup of events and associated actions typically also depends on your organization s needs You can print and use this checklist as you go along Verify initial configuration of cameras and other hardware devices s Before doing anything on XProtect Professional make sure the hardware devices cameras video encoders etc that you want to use are correctly installed and configured with IP addresses passwords etc as specified by the manufacturers Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect the devices to the network and XProtect Professional Register your XProtect Professional software Le This step may not be required your XProtect Professional vendor often takes care of the process for you You must first register your software and next activate your licenses See Manage licenses see About activating licenses on page 35 Install XProtect Professional x See Install surveillance server software see Install your surveillance server software
57. keep them retention time Some organizations want to keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several months or years Other organizations may only want to archive recordings from one or two cameras and they may want to keep their archives for much shorter periods of time You should always first consider the storage capacity of the local drive containing the default archiving directory to which archived recordings are always moved even though they may immediately after be moved to an archiving location on another drive Basically the capacity of the local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all cameras When you archive XProtect Professional automatically checks that space required for the data to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available at the archiving location If not the archive location s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived When you estimate storage capacity required for archiving consider your organization s needs then plan for worst case rather than best case scenarios You cannot archive to external drives only to local drives on the XProtect Professional server Tip The Storage Calculator found in the Support section of the Milestone website can help you determine the storage capacity required for your surveillance system www milestonesys com 146 Adva
58. list of selectable paths initially selection archives represents all drives on the server both local and mapped drives You can add further paths with the New path feature below the list Select particular paths for use as dynamic archiving paths You can Use also select a previously manually added path for removal see description of Remove button in the following Drive Letter representing the drive in question for example C Path to where you save the files for example C or en OurServer OurFolder OurSubfolder Drive Size Total size of the drive Free Space Amount of unused space left on the drive www milestonesys com 86 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 New path Add Remove Video recording Administrator s Manual Specify a new path and add it to the list using the Add button Paths must be reachable by the surveillance system server and you must specify the path using the UNC Universal Naming Convention format example server volume directory When the new path is added you can select it for use as a dynamic archiving path Add the path specified in the New path field to the list Remove a selected path which has previously been manually added from the list You cannot remove any of the initially listed paths not even when they are selected When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 you can specify certai
59. may include other content such as HTML pages and static images in addition to video from cameras VMD Video motion detection way of defining activity in a scene by analyzing image data and the differences in a series of images W Wizard A utility to help perform a particular task quickly while also ensuring coverage of all relevant parameters For example the Adjust Motion Detection wizard quickly helps you configure motion detection on each of XProtect Professional s cameras without the risk of forgetting to set any key parameters X XProtect Smart Client An advanced client application for letting remote users access XProtect Professional in order to view live images play back recorded images activate output print and export evidence and so on access to features depend on individual user rights Some of the features include live and playback video digital zoom and timeline browsing The Smart Client should always be downloaded from XProtect Professional and installed locally on remote users computers 222 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Index Administrator s Manual 3 360 degrees panomorph support 191 360 lens 99 A About activating licenses 27 30 31 177 About activating licenses after grace period 31 About alarms 109 170 172 173 174 About alarms in the Smart Client 172 About archiving 27 47 52 54 55 56 57 63 68 74 75 77
60. milestonesys com Administrator s Manual If selected e mail notifications will not be sent if XProtect Professional loses contact with a camera Otherwise automatic e mail notifications will be sent in such cases regardless of any scheduled e mail notification periods see E mail notification on page 156 Minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each e mail notification per camera This interval only applies for e mail notification generated by detected motion or database related events e mail notification generated by other types of events will still be sent out whenever the events occur Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each motion or database related e mail notification per camera even if motion or database events are detected in between If specifying 0 e mail notifications will be sent each time motion or database events are detected potentially resulting in a very large number of e mail notifications being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider cameras motion detection see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 sensitivity settings Enter the e mail address you wish to appear as the sender of the e mail notification Type the name of the SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server which will be used for sending the e mail notifications Compared with other mail transfer methods SMTP has the advantage that you will
61. nana 176 USERS 176 fere WI m 176 Add basit USO S 177 Add Windows Users assssnsssnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmis nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn annann 177 RTE gie LTE 178 Configure user and group rights eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseee eene n enne nnn nnn nnnm nnmnnn 179 User DORIS ee 179 SEAVICES 183 PADOUUSOIVICCS pe 183 Start and RTE 184 ciu e aaa anaapa aaaea a aema aea aaa aeaaea a AKESA aaa EEEa 184 Mobile Servet ees 184 Mobile Server Manager sssnssussuunsuununnnuunnunnnunnnnunnuunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnne 190 ALARMS rcc b EQ ae ae E E CERTO UE aa 192 About alarms 2 0 AS E E E De etes dec eisc ctus 192 Add a time profile for Alarms eseeleeeeeeeeeeeesesieeeeneseeeee NEEN nn nnns nnn 194 Add an EI VO crei nceee tue tei ex sect ady evade ected eect cd cauce ie cuu aii de eis eic eue 195 Configure analytics events in alarms eeeeeeeseseeee eese entente nnn tnnt nnn 195 Alarms DODERER 195 MIP gRIcI Lm 199 About MIP e ET 199 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 BACKUP AND RESTORE CONFIGURATION
62. new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Note that if you move archived recordings XProtect Professional will also archive what is currently in the camera database In case you wonder why the camera database is empty just after you have moved archived recordings this is the reason Total Size Total size of the drive Free Space Amount of unused space left on the drive If using this option highly recommended you should select a number of different local drives for archiving If the path containing the XProtect Professional database is on one of the drives you have selected for archiving XProtect Professional will always try to archive to that drive first If not XProtect Professional automatically archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at any time provided there is not a camera database using that drive Which drive has the most available space may change during the archiving process and archiving may therefore happen to several archiving drives during the same process This fact will have no impact on how users find and view archived recordings Dynamic path selection for archives Lets you add a network drive to the list of drives First specify the network drive then click Add the button becomes available when you specify a network drive Note that network drives cannot be used for recording only for archiving Network Drive Specify when you want XProtect Professio
63. normal frame rate e You want to receive any e mail and or SMS notifications regarding one or more cameras e Archiving takes place e PTZ cameras should patrol and according to which patrolling profile About archiving Archiving is an integrated and automated feature in XProtect Professional with which recordings are moved to free up space for new recordings By default recordings are stored in the XProtect Professional database for each camera The database for each camera is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB XProtect Professional automatically archives see About archiving on page 143 recordings if a camera s database becomes full Consequently having sufficient archiving space is important You do not have to do anything to enable archiving It runs in the background and is automatically enabled and carried out from the moment XProtect Professional is installed The most recent recordings are saved on a local storage in order to prevent network related problems in the saving process The default settings for XProtect Professional is to perform archiving once a day or if your database becomes full You can change the settings see Archiving on page 154 for when and how often archiving takes place in the Management Application You can also schedule archiving see About archiving schedules on page 149 up to 24 times a day with a minimum of one hour between each one This way you can proactively archive r
64. of manual e however also possible to combine manual recording with third recording party applications if integrating these with XProtect Professional through an API or similar and in such cases specifying a maximum duration may be relevant If you are simply using manual recording in connection with the Smart Client disregard this property Frame rate MJPEG When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go Either in order to speed up things or because the properties in question are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to individual cameras All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Note that all of the Frame Rate MJPEG properties can also be specified individually for each camera see Recording on page 105 using MJPEG Properties in this window Template and common Dropertles 93 Regular frame rate Droperties 94 Speedup frame rate properties sese 95 Template and common properties www milestonesys com 93 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Template Apply Template Select All Clear All Set selected template value on selected cameras Set all template values on selected cameras Camera Name Administrator s Manual The template can help you configure similar properties quickly Say you have 20 c
65. on page 26 If you are upgrading an existing version of XProtect Professional see Upgrade from a previous version on page 28 Ls Open the Management Application See Access the Management Application Add hardware devices in XProtect Professional Ls XProtect Professional can quickly scan your network for relevant hardware devices cameras video encoders etc and add them to your system See Add hardware devices see The Add Hardware Devices wizard on page 44 www milestonesys com 31 Getting started Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Configure cameras in XProtect Professional s You can specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to your XProtect Professional system Settings include video format resolution motion detection sensitivity where to store and archive see About archiving on page 143 recordings any PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom preset positions association with microphones speakers etc See About video and recording configuration on page 77 Configure events input and output Ls If required system events for example based on input from sensors can be used to automatically trigger actions in XProtect Professional Examples of actions starting or stopping recording on cameras switching to a particular video frame rate making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions Events can also be used to activate hardware output such as lights or sirens See Overvie
66. on a network for longer periods of time and is used when connecting computers and other devices on the internet TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol combination of protocols or standards used when connecting computers and other devices on networks including the internet Telnet Terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet Transact An add on to XProtect Professional XProtect Transact can help you prevent loss and shrinkage through video evidence combined with time linked POS or ATM transaction data U UDP User Datagram Protocol connectionless protocol for sending data packets across networks Primarily used for broadcasting messages UDP is a fairly simple protocol with less error recovery features than for example the TCP protocol 221 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 UPS A UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply works as a battery driven secondary power source providing the necessary power for saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities UPSs vary in sophistication but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files for alerting system administrators etc URL Uniform Resource Lo
67. one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required 3 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar www milestonesys com 171 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 When you use this option you configure client users separately from clients access See Add individual users see Add basic users on page 177 Add user groups on page 178 and Configure user and group rights on page 179 Server access properties Properties in this window SEIVEMACCOSS REP 172 Local P EE 173 Language support and XML encoding sssssssssesresssrrssrerrssrrrnssrrrnssns 173 Server access When you configure server access on page 171 that is clients access to the XProtect Professional server specify the following Name of the XProtect Professional server as it will appear in clients Server name Client users with rights to configure their clients will see the name of the server when they create views in their clients Port number to use for communication between clients and the surveillance server The default port number is 80 you can change the port number if port 80 is used for other purposes in your organization Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the internet through a router or firewall If you select this option also specify the public outside IP address and port number in th
68. required under an event This way you can for example make one timer event trigger something 10 seconds after the main event another timer event trigger something else 30 seconds after the main event and a third timer event trigger something else 2 minutes after the main event Configure hardware output on event Once you have added hardware output see Add a hardware output on page 127 such as lights sirens door openers etc you can associate the hardware output with events This way particular hardware output can be activated automatically when events occur Example When a door is opened hardware input event lights are switched on hardware output When making the associations you can select between all output and events defined on your XProtect Professional server you are not limited to selecting output or events defined on particular hardware devices 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration then expand Events and Output Right click Output Control on Event and select Properties 2 Fill in the relevant properties see Output control on event Events and Output specific properties on page 142 3 Click OK 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar You can use a single event for activating more than one output You cannot delete associations but you can change your selections or select None in bo
69. selections in the Apply Template column Set selected template value on Apply only a selected value from the template to selected cameras selected cameras Tip To select more than one value press CTRL while selecting Set all template values on EE Apply all values from the template to selected cameras Properties in this window If the camera uses the MJPEG video Tomat 89 If the camera uses the MPEG video Tomat 91 If the camera uses the MJPEG video format With MJPEG you can define frame rates for regular as well as speedup modes If the camera offers dual stream you can also enable this www milestonesys com 89 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Regular frame rate mode Frame Rate Live Frame Rate Recording Frame Rate Speedup frame rate mode Enable speedup frame rate Frame Rate Live Frame Rate Recording Frame Rate On motion www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Required average frame rate for video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour Required average frame rate for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Required average frame rate for recorded video f
70. settings eeseeeeeeeeereeeeeenen enne nnne nnn nnns 64 ADJUST MOTION DETECTION WIZARD es cere eere e rene eene nen nennen anna n nnn 66 Exclude E TEE 66 Motion Detection e 67 CONFIGURE USER ACCESS WIZARD eeeeeennnnnnneen nennen nennen nnne nn nnn 68 Server access dn uec iot eee a aaaea aa aana uuu tasse nas nc dU uet eyeuevscnuedeuce 69 Basic amp Windows Users 1 eee Leere iere eL ceseeeeeseconceecseneeasseconceeseeueeee 69 Configure User Access wizard access summary eese nennen 70 ADVANCED CONFIGURATION cccccessseeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenenees 71 ef leie 71 About hardware devices eese eese nante nnmnnn nn nn nnne nennen 71 About the Replace Hardware Device wizard eene 71 About dedicated input output devices cecinere 73 Configure hardware devices csseccsseeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeneeeeeeneseseaeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaesaaneeenseeeeeas 74 Delete hardware devices 1 eseeeeeeeeeeee esee eene enne nennen nnne nnmnnn nnmnnn innen 74 Replace hardware devices eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees eene enne nnne nnn sni nnne nnne nns innen 74 Hardware properties mee 75 CAMERAS AND STORAGE INFORMATION e e een
71. simply overwrite the value in the field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the field Therefore if you specify 0 you will log current day s activity if you specify 1 you will keep one day plus the current day s activity and so on These log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users folder for the operating system you are using To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder A new log file is created for each day on which events occur A log file older than the number of days specified in the field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stored for seven days To specify another number of days max 9999 simply overwrite the value in the field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the field Therefore if you specify 0 you will log current day s activity if you specify 1 you will keep one day plus the current day s activity and so on Audit logging is the only type of XProtect Professional logging which is not compulsory Select clear the check box to enable disable audit logging These log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users folder for the operating system you are using To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field
72. special characters and must not be longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers Cam 3 123456789 More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the separate documentation for the Smart Client Path to the folder in which the camera s database should be stored Default is CAMediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can only specify a path to a folder on a local drive You cannot specify a path to a network drive If you use a network drive it is not be possible to save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable If you change the recording path and you have existing recordings at the old location you are asked whether you want to move the recordings to the new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Tip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available you can improve performance by distributing individual cameras databases across several drives Only editable if not using dynamic paths for archiving see About archiving on page 143 Path to the folder in which the camera s archived recordings should be stored Default is C MediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can specify a path to a local or network drive If you change the archiving path and the
73. stream for live viewing and another stream for recording purposes with different resolution encoding and frame rate Select the type of the live stream Stream settings for viewing live video and for recording video may very well be different in order to get the best result Select the resolution of the camera Select the camera s live frame rate per second FPS When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras properties include the possibility of selecting a default microphone and or speaker for the camera www milestonesys com 104 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 With a default microphone and or speaker selected for a camera audio from the microphone and or speaker will automatically be used when video from the camera is viewed If a microphone and or a speaker is attached to the same hardware device as the camera that microphone and or speaker will be the camera s default microphone and or speaker if you do not select otherwise Select required default microphone Default Microphone Tip Note that you can select microphones or speakers attached to another hardware device than the selected camera Default Speaker Select required default speaker The ability to select a default microphone and or speaker for the camera requires that at least one microphone and or speaker has been attached to a ha
74. stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames record only pixels that change this helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files Select the check box if you only want to record keyframes Record Keyframe Only Lets you select under which conditions video from the camera should be recorded e Always Record whenever the camera is enabled see General on page 100 and scheduled to be online see Online period on page 155 the latter allows for time based recording e Never Never record Live video will be displayed but since no video is kept in the database users will not be able to play back video from the camera e Motion Detection Select this to record video in which motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected Unless post recording see the following Record on is used recording will stop immediately after the last motion is detected e Event Select this to record video when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of recording on event requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields e Motion Detection amp Event
75. surveillance server 1 Verify that your computer meets the XProtect Smart Client s minimum system requirements 2 Openan Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the surveillance System server using the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator 3 On the Welcome page click Language and select your required language www milestonesys com 13 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Tip You can easily change the language in the Options menu of the XProtect Smart Client Under XProtect Smart Client Installers click the relevant XProtect Smart Client link to start the installer 4 f you receive a security warning Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar accept this by clicking Run or similar the exact name depends on your browser version 5 The XProtect Smart Client setup wizard starts In the wizard follow the installation instructions The wizard suggests an installation path Normally you can use the suggested installation path However if you have previously used add on products such as XProtect Analytics or XProtect Transact this path might not be valid anymore see Install from a DVD on page 14 Install from a DVD 1 Verify that your computer meets the XProtect Smart Client s minimum system requirements 2 Insert the surveillance system software DVD select the required language and then click
76. switch follow this procedure 1 2 3 4 e Select Start gt Control Panel and double click the System icon Select the Advanced tab and click the Settings button in the Startup and Recovery section Click the Edit button in the System Startup section The boot ini file will launch in an editor Remove the 3GB from the end of the appropriate boot entry line under the operating systems section Save and close the file Click OK in the Startup and Recovery section Reboot after editing the boot ini file for the changes to take effect What to do If running Windows 2008 Server or Windows Vista 1 Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories right click Command Prompt and select Run as administrator then click Continue Enter the following command to add the 3 GB switch to the current operating system boot entry BCDEDIT SET INCREASEUSERVA 3072 Where o USERVA specifies an alternate amount of user mode virtual address space for operating systems o 3072 Specifies 3 GB 3072 MB 3 Reboot after editing for the changes to take effect Remove the 3GB switch 1 Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories right click Command Prompt and select Run as administrator then click Continue Enter the following command to remove the 3 GB switch from the current operating system boot entry BCDEDIT DELETEVALUE INCREASEUSERVA Reboot after editing f
77. system In the Mobile server settings you can set up how many users should be able to use the Video push feature in the video management system www milestonesys com 184 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 About saving configuration changes in XProtect Enterprise 8 0 and streamlined XProtect software versions The following applies to XProtect Enterprise 8 0 XProtect Professional 8 0 XProtect Express 1 0 XProtect Essential 2 0 and XProtect Go 2 0 software versions only If you are logged into the XProtect Mobile client and are watching one or more cameras views while at the same time changing configuration in the Management Application the live video from the camera may freeze in the XProtect Mobile client if you click Save Configuration and Restart Surveillance Services in the Management Application To avoid this scenario you must restart the Milestone XProtect Mobile service manually See the Windows Help for information about how to do this If you are using newer versions of XProtect the Milestone XProtect Mobile service is restarted with the other services and no user action is required Add edit a Mobile server 1 Do one of the following o To add anew server right click Mobile Servers From the menu that appears select Create New o To edit a Mobile server select the wanted server 2 Fill in edit the needed properties 3 In the lower right corner click Apply 4
78. the Software Registration Service Center and then follow the registration procedure If you have not yet registered your SLC you must do so see earlier 3 When done click Activate 4 When your temporary license file lic is successfully updated click Close Your license file lic is now updated and permanent Updates are visible in your Hardware Device Summary table Activate by using this process each time you add a new device If you receive an online activation error message Under rare circumstances you may receive one of the following error messages during online activation Should you receive one the following list of Problems and What to do will help you identify the problem e Unable to access license server Error activating license License not allowed Feature not registered Feature already in use Failed to login o Problem Online activation was not possible either due to a problem on the online activation server itself a problem with your connection to the online activation server or to a problem with the specified information such as username or password o What to do Contact Milestone Support support milestonesys com who will investigate the issue for you If activation has already taken place on another system activation should not be necessary as another system is already running with your activated licenses If you believe that this is wrong contact Milestone Support support milestonesys com wh
79. the entire view of the camera whereas the frames that follow record only pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files N NTLM In a Windows network NT LAN Manager is a network authentication protocol P Panomorph A type of lens that allows the creation and viewing of 360 degree images P frame Predictive frame the MPEG standard for digital video compression uses P frames together with I frames An I frame also known as a keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals The I frame records the entire view of the camera whereas the frames that follow the P frames record only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual PIN Personal identification number or personal identity number number used to identify and authenticate users Ping A computer network administration utility used to determine whether an IP address is available by sending a small amount of data to see if it responds The word ping was chosen because it mirrors the sound of a sonar You send the ping command using a Windows command prompt Polling Regularly checking the state of something for example whether input has been received on a particular input port of a device The defined interval between such state checks is often called a polling frequency Port Logical endpoint for data traffic Networks use differen
80. the event in question and click the button Output When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras you can also associate a camera with particular hardware output see Add a hardware output on page 127 for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights Associated output can then be activated automatically when motion is detected in video from the camera or manually when Smart Client users with the necessary rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 view live video from the camera 1 Inthe Available output list select the required output It is only possible to select one output at a time Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable output you can quickly do it Use the Configure Output button located below the other fields Tip Even though output is configured separately for each camera you can select between all output on your XProtect Professional system regardless whether output originates on another hardware device than the camera itself 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected output to the o Onmanual activation list in which case the output will be available for manual activation in the Smart Client and or o On motion detected list in which case the output will be activated when motion is detected in video from the camera If required the same output can appear on both lists 3 Re
81. the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in red Toggle the red area indicating privacy masking on and off Toggling Show privacy mask the red area off may provide a less obscured view of the preview image Clear Clear the privacy masking 360 lens 360 lens technology allows you to view 360 panoramic video through an advanced lens If a camera is going to use 360 lens technology you must enable the technology and in some cases enter a special license key Enable 360 lens Select check box to enable use of the 360 lens technology and to be able to specify further properties www milestonesys com 112 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Select to enable panomorph support Panomorph is an advanced technology can provide high resolution in zones of interest while at Enable panomorph support the same time using fewer pixels than conventional fisheye solutions In the list also select whether the camera is located in the ceiling on a wall or on ground level When enabling the panomorph support functionality you must also select a Registered Panomorph Lens RPL number from the ImmerVision Enables panomorph RPL number list This is to ensure identification and correct configuration of the lens used with the camera in question The RPL number is usually found on the r lens i
82. the per process memory limit to 3 GB Use the first method if running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 20083 Use the second method if running Windows 2008 Server Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Enterprise or Windows Vista Ultimate What to do If running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 The following technique can be used to add the 3 GB switch to the boot ini file 1 From a command prompt enter the following to add the 3 GB switch to the end of the first line of the operating system section in the boot ini file requires administrative privileges BOOTCFG RAW 3GB A ID 1 Where o RAW specifies the operating system options for the boot entry The previous operating system options will be modified o 3GB specifies the 3 GB switch o Aspecifies that the operating system options entered with the RAW switch will be appended to the existing operating system options o JD specifies the boot entry ID in the OS Load Options section of the boot ini file to add the operating system options to The boot entry ID number can be obtained by performing the command BOOTCFG QUERY this displays the contents of the boot ini file at the command prompt 2 Reboot after editing the boot ini file for the changes to take effect www milestonesys com 209 Common tasks Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Remove the 3 GB Switch Remove the 3 GB switch If you want to undo the 3 GB
83. the same port number as you set when you specify your Video push settings see Video push on page 189 If these values are not identical your Video push driver will not be able to work User name Select any user name from the drop down list Password Type in the password for the Video push driver The password for your Video push driver is Milestone this cannot be changed Hardware Driver Select the Video Push Driver Verified Select if the Video push driver runs on a secured HTTPS connection Mobile server settings Properties in this window far m 187 EE gt T E EEN 188 MISO PUSTE 189 ec m 189 Info Fill in and specify general settings for the Mobile server Server name Name of the Mobile server Description Description of the Mobile server Choose between all Mobile servers currently installed to the Mobile server specific XProtect amp video management system Only XProtect Mobile servers that are up and running are shown in the list Connection type re methods are HTTP only HTTP and HTTPS or HTTPS nly Default time frame 30 sec for how often the Mobile server client Client timeout HTTP must indicate to the Mobile server server that it is up and running Milestone recommends that you do not increase the time frame A Select how you want to log in to the Mobile server server should Login method take place Possibl
84. to become a Matrix recipient the computer must have the multi purpose Smart Client installed For more information about Matrix recipients refer to the Smart Client User s Manual available on the XProtect Professional software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com Also once installed the Smart Client has its own built in help system There are two ways in which Matrix triggered video can appear on a Matrix recipient e Manual triggering Another user wants to share important video and sends it from a Smart Client or from a custom made web page to the required Matrix recipient e Automatic triggering Video is sent to the required Matrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened or when the surveillance system detects motion in the video from a camera About Matrix recipients A computer on which Matrix triggered video can be viewed is known as a Matrix recipient In order to become a Matrix recipient the computer must have the multi purpose Smart Client installed For more information about Matrix recipients refer to the Smart Client User s Manual available on the XProtect Professional software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com Also once installed the Smart Client has its own built in help system www milestonesys com 157 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 There are two ways in which Mat
85. to clear selection When done Selected columns should contain the items to be included Reasons for Closing Select to enable that all alarms must be assigned a reason for tabEnable closing before they can be closed Add reasons for closing that the user can choose between when Reason closing alarms Examples could be Solved Trespasser or False Alarm You can create as many as you like Sound settings When you configure Sound Settings specify the following Select the sound to be associated with the alarm The list of sounds contain a number of default Windows sounds These cannot be edited However you can add new sounds of the file type wav but only if these are encoded in Pulse Code Modulation PCM Although the default sounds are standard Windows sound files local Windows settings might cause these to sound different on different machines Some users might also have deleted one or more of these sound files and will therefore be unable to play them To ensure an identical sound all over you should import and use your own wav files encoded in PCM Sounds Lets you add sounds Browse to the sound to upload one or several Ack wav files Remove a selected sound from the list of manually added sounds Remove Default sounds cannot be removed www milestonesys com 198 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Lets you test the sound In the list select the sound The so
86. unfortunate circumstances Fortunately it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration Export Management Application configuration as clone With this option all relevant XProtect Professional Management Application configuration files will be collected and GUIDs Globally Unique IDentifiers unique 128 bit numbers used for identifying individual system components such as cameras will be marked for later replacement Why are GUIDs marked for replacement GUIDs are marked for later replacement because they refer to specific components cameras etc Even though you wish to use the cloned configuration for setting up a new similar system using similar types of cameras the new system will not use the exact same physical cameras as the cloned system When the cloned configuration is later used in a new system the GUIDs will therefore be replaced with GUIDs representing the specific components of the new system After GUIDs have been marked for replacement the configuration files will be combined into one single xml file which can then be saved at a location specified by you Note that if there are unsaved changes to your configuration they will automatically be saved when you export the configuration 1 In the Management Application s File menu select Export Configuration Clone 2 Browse to the location at which you want to store the exported configuration specify a suitable file name and click Save Import previo
87. will not only delete all cameras speakers and microphones attached to the hardware device You will also delete any recordings from cameras on the hardware device 1 4 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Hardware Devices right click the hardware device you want to delete and select Delete Hardware device Confirm that you want to delete the hardware device and all its recordings Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Restart see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service If deleting a hardware device is not the right thing to do consider disabling the individual cameras speakers or microphones connected to the hardware device 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Hardware Devices and expand the hardware device in question Right click the camera or microphone or speaker that you want to disable and select Disable Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Restart see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service Replace hardware devices If required you can replace a hardware device which you have previously added to and configured on your surveillance system with a new one This can typically be relevant if you
88. works for PTZ type 1 cameras where preset positions are configured and stored on the XProtect Professional server If the camera is a PTZ type 2 camera and you import preset positions which have previously been defined and stored on the PTZ camera itself through the camera s own configuration interface PTZ scanning will stop working For more information about PTZ types see PTZ preset positions on page 115 Pause PTZ patrolling PTZ patrolling is automatically paused when the camera is operated manually as well as if PTZ on Event on page 120 is used PTZ patrolling can also be paused if motion is detected Tip Note that pause settings are tied to the selected patrolling profile This allows you the flexibility of having different pause settings for different patrolling profiles on the same camera Pause patrolling if motion is detected To pause PTZ patrolling when motion is detected so that the PTZ camera will remain at the position where motion was detected for a specified period of time do the following www milestonesys com 119 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 1 Select the Pause patrolling if motion is detected check box 2 Select whether the PTZ camera should resume patrolling o After a certain number of seconds has passed since first detection of motion regardless whether further motion is detected m or o After a certain number of seconds has passed without fur
89. you have previously added to and configured on your surveillance system To open the Replace Hardware Device wizard right click the device that you want to replace and select Replace Hardware Device The wizard is divided into these pages e New hardware device information on page 71 e Database action see Camera and database action on page 72 New hardware device information Specify details about the new hardware device Address IP address or host name of the hardware device Port number on which to scan The default is port 80 If a hardware device is located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall you Port may need to specify a different port number When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the port and IP address used by the hardware device User name for the hardware device s administrator account Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer s default user names for their hardware devices If that is the case in your organization select default do not type a manufacturer s default user name as this can be a source of error trust that XProtect User name Professional will know the manufacturer s default user name Other typical user names such as admin or root are also selectable from the list If you want a user name which is not on the list simply type a new user name Tip User names you enter will subsequently be added to the list SO you can easily select t
90. 192 168 200 226 80 TOpsECreT Production Level 3 192 168 200 227 80 topS cr t Storage Room 192 168 200 228 80 ttooppssecrett Canteen www milestonesys com 51 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 192 168 200 229 80 ecsotpert Admin Office 192 168 200 230 80 SECRETtop Annex 192 168 200 231 80 optescter VIP Parking 192 168 200 232 80 scteropte Workshop 192 168 200 233 80 scopetetr Alleyway 192 168 200 234 80 optescter Demo Room 192 168 200 235 80 oPtEscEr Meeting Room 1 Meeting Room 2 Meeting Room3 Meeting Room 4 CSV file format and requirements The CSV file must have a header line determining what each value on the subsequent lines is about and subsequent lines must each contain information about one hardware device only A minimum of information is always required for each hardware device The MAC address of the hardware device used in the template configuration Required format 12 hex characters without spaces or six groups of two hex characters separated with dashes or colons HardwareOldMacAddress The MAC address of the new hardware device to be used in the real configuration Required format 12 hex characters without spaces or six groups of two hex characters separated with dashes or colons HardwreNewMacAddress HardwareAddress IP address of the hardware device User name for hardware device s administrat
91. 6 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1 5 GB per camera www milestonesys com 147 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Or o the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 1096 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose data from the archives being deleted Ultimately if there are no archives to delete XProtect Professional will attempt to resize camera databases by deleting their oldest recordings This will happen if o there is less than 5 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 20 GB plus 1 GB per camera Or o the available disk space goes below 75 MB plus 10 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 175 MB 75 MB plus 10 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 596 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose the data deleted as part of the database resizing process
92. 8 1 In order to customize the default installation settings an xml file with modified values must be provided as input In order to generate the xml file with default values open a command prompt in the directory where the installation program is located and execute following command For XProtect Smart Client gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe generateargsfile args xml For XProtect Professional gt MilestoneXProtectXProtect Professionallnstaller exe generateargsfile args xml Open the generated args xml file using for example Notepad exe and perform any changes needed Then in order to run silent installation using these modified values execute following command in the same directory For XProtect Smart Client gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe arguments args xml quiet For XProtect Professional gt MilestoneXProtectXProtect Professionallnstaller exe arguments args xml quiet XProtect Mobile client About XProtect Mobile client XProtect Mobile client is a mobile surveillance solution closely integrated with the rest of your XProtect surveillance setup It runs on your Android tablet or smartphone or your Apple device tablet smartphone or portable music player and gives you access to cameras views and other functionality set up in the Management Application In order to use XProtect Mobile client with XProtect Professional you must add a Mobile server see About Mobile server on page 184 to esta
93. 86 to the video management system by specifying the IP address of the Mobile server the Mobile server must be added manually and will not be detected in automatic hardware searches Once finished click Apply 5 Onthe Video Push tab click Find Cameras If successful the newly added Video push hardware device appears in this list and is ready to use 6 Click Apply 7 Click File Save Add a Video push channel as a hardware device If you add a Video push channel you must add the Video push driver to your Management Application Management Client To do so 1 Open the Add New Hardware Wizard in your Management Application Management Client 2 Choose the Manual option The Video push driver will not be detected in automatic hardware searches 3 Specify hardware information settings and select the hardware driver manually 4 Once finished your Video push driver is ready and can be used in your XProtect Mobile client Add hardware devices settings Specify the following settings when you add a Video Push driver in the Add Hardware Devices wizard Select if the Video push driver should added to the XProtect video Use management system Address Type in the XProtect Mobile server network address www milestonesys com 186 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Type in the port number for your Video push driver The default port is 80 Port Important You must set
94. A V Click OK Specify General access on page 180 and Camera access on page 181 properties These properties will determine the rights of the group s future members Click OK Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Now you can add users to the group In the navigation pane right click the group you just created and Add basic users on page 177 or Add Windows users on page 177 as required Configure user and group rights User group rights are configured during the process of adding users groups see Add basic Users on page 177 Add Windows users on page 177 and Add user groups on page 178 Note that you can also add basic and Windows users through the Configure User Access wizard on page 68 However when using the wizard all users you add will have access all to cameras including any new cameras added at a later stage If you at a later stage want to edit the rights of a user or group 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Users right click the required user or group and select Properties Edit General Access on page 180 and Camera Access on page 181 properties These properties will determine the rights of the user group Click OK Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar User properties Prope
95. Adjust Motion Detection wizard 57 Administrator 191 Administrator rights 21 Advanced 39 41 Advanced configuration 62 Alarm Access Properties 161 Alarm data settings 175 Alarms 170 Alarms definition 113 173 175 Alarms properties 173 Analytics event 111 117 Analytics event settings for alarms properties 37 Analytics Events 191 Analytics events settings 36 224 Index Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 API 191 Application settings 35 Apply save configuration changes 188 Archiving 126 136 Aspect ratio 191 ATM 191 Audio 91 106 Audio recording 86 Audio selection 86 Automatic response if running out of disk space 129 AVI 191 B Back up and restore Alarms configuration 179 Back up system configuration 25 178 Back up your current configuration 25 Backup and restore configuration 178 Basic amp Windows Users 60 Before you start 20 Browser 191 C Camera access 135 157 158 159 160 Camera and database action 62 63 Camera properties 88 Cameras and storage information 68 Camera specific scheduling properties 136 Carousel 191 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Central 150 191 Central properties 150 151 Change language 36 Change SLC 34 Change restore Management Application behavior 28 36 Clear your Internet browser s cache upon upgrade 16 208 Clients 12 Codec 191
96. An elevator is stuck Through a camera mounted in the elevator Smart Client operators can see that there is an elderly lady in the elevator A microphone attached to the camera records that the lady says I am afraid please help me out Through a speaker attached to the camera operators can tell the lady that Help is on its way you should be out in less than fifteen minutes Show or hide microphone and or speaker If you have added more microphone and or speaker to your XProtect Professional system than you need you can hide the ones you do not need by right clicking the relevant microphone and or speaker and select Hide If you need the hidden microphone again you can right click the overall microphone and or speaker icon and select Show Hidden Items Speaker properties When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras you can determine when audio should be recorded or not Your choice applies for all cameras on your XProtect Professional system Speakers are by default enabled meaning that they are able to transfer audio to XProtect Professional If required you can disable an individual speaker in which case no audio will be transferred from the speaker to XProtect Professional Enabled The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain
97. Aspect ratio The height width relationship of an image ATM Automatic teller machine machine that dispenses money when a personal coded card is used www milestonesys com AVI A popular file format for video Files in this format carry the avi file extension Browser A software application for finding and displaying web pages C Carousel A feature for displaying video from several cameras one after the other in a single camera position The required cameras and the intervals between changes are specified by the XProtect Professional administrator The carousel feature is available if configured in the Smart Client Central A product available as an add on to XProtect Professional XProtect Central provides a complete overview of status and alarms from any number of XProtect Professional servers regardless of location Codec A technology for compressing and decompressing audio and video data for example in an exported AVI file MPEG and Indeo are examples of frequently used codecs CSV Comma separated values data format that stores tabular data where the lines represent rows in a table and commas define the columns in a simple file For example data about cameras may appear as comma separated values in a csv file which can then be imported into XProtect Professional A simple but effective method if setting up several similar systems 215 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Pr
98. CP IP 196 Telnet 197 Template and common properties 82 Test a generic event 114 121 The Add Hardware Devices wizard 27 32 33 39 62 64 The Configure Video and Recording wizard 49 127 131 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Time profile 176 Time server recommended 22 Timer event 113 121 Transact 197 U UDP 197 Updates 19 Upgrade 25 Upgrade from a previous version 23 25 27 178 UPS e 197 URL 197 Use the built in help system 28 User information 159 User properties 159 Users 156 V VCA 109 113 173 197 Video 85 89 137 Video device drivers 26 Video encoder 197 Video push 165 167 Video recording 76 Video server 197 Video settings and preview 49 View 197 View archived recordings 131 230 Index Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 View video from cameras in Management Application 57 58 97 101 103 106 189 190 Virus scanning information 22 132 VMD 197 Ww Wizard e 197 Wizards 39 X XProtect Mobile client 15 XProtect Professional overview 10 XProtect Smart Client 12 198 XProtect Web Client 15 www milestonesys com 231 Index About Milestone Systems Founded in 1998 Milestone Systems is the global industry leader in open platform IP video management software The XProtect platform delivers powerful surveillance that is easy to manage reli
99. If that is the case in your organization select default do not type a manufacturer s default user name as this can be a source of error trust that XProtect Professional will know the manufacturer s default user name Other typical user names such as admin or root are also selectable from the list If you want a user name which is not on the list simply type a new user name Tip User names you enter will subsequently be added to the list so you can easily select them later Password for the hardware device s administrator account a k a the root password Read only field displaying the type of video device driver used for communication with the hardware device Read only field displaying the serial number of device The serial number is usually identical to the 12 character hexadecimal MAC address of the hardware device example 0123456789AF The current license status for the hardware Opens a wizard see About the Replace Hardware Device wizard on page 71 with which you if required can replace the selected hardware device with another one This can typically be relevant if you replace a physical camera on your network The wizard helps you take all relevant issues into account for example deciding what to do with recordings from cameras attached to the old hardware device etc The PTZ Device tab is only available if you configure see Configure hardware devices on page 74 video encoder hardware devices on wh
100. Install XProtect Smart Client 3 If you receive a security warning Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar accept this by clicking Run or similar the exact name depends on your browser version 4 The XProtect Smart Client installation wizard starts In the wizard follow the installation instructions MIP Plug ins Your XProtect Smart Client may contain a MIP Plug ins pane The pane is used for handling plug in functionality typically for third party applications for example an access control system or similar which can be controlled through the XProtect Smart Client If your MIP Plug ins pane has no content itis because your XProtect Smart Client has no plug in functionality On some surveillance systems you can add more types of content to views in your XProtect Smart Client This may be the case if your organization uses add on products for increasing the capabilities of its surveillance system Examples e XProtect Transact which is used for tracking transactions from cash registers ATMs etc linked with video recordings e XProtect Analytics which provides video content analysis tasks such as license plate recognition perimeter protection left objects detection etc The XProtect Professional plug in for XProtect Analytics can only run on a 32 bit version of the XProtect Professional The plug in cannot run on a 64 bit installation By default in XProtect Professional v
101. Inthe top toolbar click File gt Save IMPORTANT If you edit settings for Login method All cameras view and Outputs and events while you are connected to the XProtect Mobile client you must restart the XProtect Mobile client for the new settings to take effect Delete a Mobile server 1 From the navigation pane expand Servers gt Mobile Servers in order to see existing servers 2 Right click the unwanted server and select Delete 3 Click Yes Rename a Mobile server 1 From the navigation pane expand Servers gt Mobile Servers in order to see existing servers 2 Select the required Mobile server 3 On the Info tab which opens once the Mobile server is selected change the name of the server by typing in the Server name and Description fields 4 Inthe lower right corner click Apply 5 In the toolbar click File gt Save www milestonesys com 185 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Add a Video push channel To add a Video push channel see About Video push on page 184 do the following 1 Onthe Video Push tab select the Video push checkbox 2 Adda video push channel by changing the number of channels from 0 default to the number of video push channels needed Once added video push channels appear in the Channels mapping 3 Click File gt Save 4 Add the Mobile server as a hardware device see Add a Video push channel as a hardware device on page 1
102. LECTION enne nenne nennen nnn nnn a nhan nean nana KEEN 41 CHANGE RESTORE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION BEHAVIOR e eene nnn 41 CHANGE LANGUAGE eese n nn nnn nn nnnm a annua n oaa saa a a Dass ausa suse mennenm nennen nnna 41 ANALYTICS EVENTS SETTINGS gen stees Pues enba ERE UA S FUEEEPE REEF ACE D RENE EE EDU NECEM EE 42 Analytics event settings for alarms properties eessssuss 42 EVENT SERVER SETTINGS 5 ccosccisaebn prit deriindnnkd da E ce VE Dal I LS EDI ODD DK 42 WIZARDS T H 44 THE ADD HARDWARE DEVICES WIZARD eene nennen nennen nnns 44 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 EXDIGSS oc nounuuc eue LIH MI EIMUM I IM IM 45 arg mee 47 DEDE e 49 Import from CSV AUT 51 THE CONFIGURE VIDEO AND RECORDING WIZARD eeeeeee nennen 56 Video settings and preview eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee enne nn nennt nannten 56 Online schedule crine EES ea Saca crane e rena pana aude Dapur 57 Live and recording settings Motion JPEG cameras serene 58 Live and recording settings MPEG cameras eese ennt 60 Drive SQlCCHON m 63 Recording and archiving
103. Milestone Systems XProtect Professional 8 1 milestone The Open Platform Company Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Contents Ice eil al BEE 11 XPROTECT PROFESSIONAL OVERVIEW ENKEN nnnm nnn nnn KENNEN KEREN KEEN 11 CHIENTS eege EE Ee Ee EE EE EE E EE EE K EN EE uote 13 XProtect Smart Client 1 EENS re coitus erra nno co c Van anne ne coup NEE EEN Ne 13 XProte ct Mobile client 1 a e cau vu c aie Iura EEN co nnne aa oa Eur noce Oe SEANCE 16 XProtect Web Clierit 5 5 22 2 2 ENNEN NEEN ANEN 17 RECORDING SERVER MANAGER KKK KKK KEN KEEN RENE KENNEN KEREN annua annm unas 18 DOWNLOAD MANAGER E 19 UPDATES ae eebe egueeeg 21 BEFORE YOU START EE 22 MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ERKENNEN RENE KEN REENEN RENE KEREN KEN RENE KEN 22 ADMINISTRATOR RIGHTS cceeceecceeceeccneceeccnscneceeccueceeccuseneceaseneceeseuseusceesensceeseneenes 23 IMPORTANT PORT NUMBERS KKK K ENKEN RENE RENE KEN REENEN RENE KEREN KEREN KENNEN 23 VIRUS SCANNING INFORMATION enne nhnn nnn nnrnn nnne sacan sa ENKEN RENE KEN 24 TIME SERVER RECOMMENDED 20 cescceeceecceccneceeccneceeccusceceseneceecensensceasenseeseensenees 24 INSTALL AND UPGRADE 0 cececceceecececceceeeececeeceeeeeececeeceeeseeees 26 ABOUT INSTALLING SURVEILLANCE SERVER SOFTWARE OR XPROTECT SMART CLIENT SILENTLY e 26 INSTALL YOUR SURVEILLANCE SERVER SOFTWARE EEN KKK hn nnn RENE KEN 26 INSTALE SIEENTBY 15 inecut e
104. Protect Professional can generate various logs Log types Management Application log files Recording Server service log files Image Server service log files Image Import service log files www milestonesys com These files log activity in the Management Application A new log file is created for each day the Management Application is used You cannot disable this type of logging Management Application log files are named according to the structure AdminYYYYMMDD log for example Admin20091231 log These files log Recording Server service see About services on page 183 activity A new log file is created for each day the service is used You cannot disable this type of logging Recording Server service log files are named according to the structure RecordingServerYY Y YMMDD log for example RecordingServer20091231 log These files log activity on the Image Server service see About services on page 183 A new log file is created for each day the service is used You cannot disable this type of logging Image Server service log files are named according to the structure ISLog YYYYMMDD log for example ISLog_20091231 log These files log activity regarding the Image Import service when this service is used for fetching pre alarm images and storing the fetched images in camera databases Pre alarm images is a feature available for selected cameras only It enables sending of images from immediately before an event
105. ST varies between countries regions When working with a surveillance system which is inherently time sensitive it is important to know how the system handles DST Spring Switch from Standard Time to DST The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward Typically the clock jumps forward from 02 00 standard time to 03 00 DST and the day thereby has 23 hours In that case there is no data between 02 00 and 03 00 in the morning since that hour for that day did not exist Fall Switch from DST to Standard Time When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall you jump one hour back Typically the clock jumps backward from 02 00 DST to 01 00 standard time repeating that hour and the day thereby has 25 hours In that case you will reach 01 59 59 then immediately revert back to 01 00 00 If the system did not react it would essentially re record that hour so the first instance of for example 01 30 would be overwritten by the second instance of 01 30 Because of this XProtect Professional will forcefully archive the current video in the event that the system time changes by more than five minutes The first instance of the 01 00 hour will not be viewable directly from clients However the data is recorded and safe and it can be browsed using the Smart Client application by opening the archived database directly Improve stability with 3 GB virtual memory Microsoft Windows 32 bit op
106. Select this to record video in which motion is detected or when an event occurs and until another event occurs Remember to select start and stop events in the neighboring columns www milestonesys com 61 Wizards Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Pre recording Seconds of pre recording Post recording Seconds of post recording Administrator s Manual You can store recordings from periods preceding detected motion and or start events Select check box to enable this feature Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring column How does pre and post recording work XProtect Professional receives video in a continuous stream from the camera whenever the camera is enabled and scheduled to be online This is what lets you view live video but it also means that XProtect Professional can easily store received video for a number of seconds in its memory a k a buffering If it turns out that the buffered video is needed for pre or post recording it is automatically appended to the recording If not it is simply discarded Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video from before recording start conditions that is motion or start event are met Usually only some seconds of pre recording is required but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of pre recording corresponding to 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds However if specifying a very long pre recording time you can potentially run
107. XProtect Device Pack used in your organization Alternatively visit the Milestone website for the latest information www milestonesys com 29 Install and upgrade Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Removal To remove the entire XProtect Professional surveillance system that is the surveillance server software and related installation files the video device drivers the Download Manager and the Smart Client from your server follow the normal Windows procedure for uninstalling programs see the Windows Help for more information Individual components such as Smart Client and video device drivers can also be removed individually using the normal Windows procedure for uninstalling programs If you remove your XProtect Professional surveillance system your recordings will not be removed They will remain on the server even after the server software has been removed Likewise the XProtect Professional configuration files will remain on the server This allows you to reuse your configuration if you install XProtect Professional again at a later time www milestonesys com 30 Install and upgrade Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Getting started Get your system up and running This checklist outlines the tasks typically involved when you set up a working XProtect Professional system Note that although information is presented as a checklist a completed checklist does not in
108. XProtect is a registered trademark of Milestone Systems A S Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc Android is a trademark of Google Inc All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners Disclaimer This text is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty Milestone Systems A S reserve the right to make adjustments without prior notification All names of people and organizations used in the examples in this text are fictitious Any resemblance to any actual organization or person living or dead is purely coincidental and unintended This product may make use of third party software for which specific terms and conditions may apply When that is the case you can find more information in the file 3rd_party_software_terms_and_conditions txt located in your Milestone surveillance system installation folder www milestonesys com Copyright trademarks and disclaimer Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 XPP81 am 1 a2 100912 www milestonesys com Copyright trademarks and disclaimer Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Introduction Administrator s Manual XProtect Professional o
109. able and proven in thousands of customer installations around the world With support for the widest choice in network hardware and integration with other systems XProtect provides best in class solutions to video enable organizations managing risks protecting people and assets optimizing processes and reducing costs Milestone software is sold through authorized and certified partners For more information visit www milestonesys com
110. abled on the hardware device itself typically through the hardware device s own configuration web page If audio on a hardware device does not work after enabling it in the Management Application you should verify whether the problem may be due to audio being disabled on the hardware device itself www milestonesys com 123 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Recording settings Always Always record audio on all applicable cameras Follow video Record audio only when video is recorded Never record audio on any cameras Note that even though audio is Never never recorded it is still be possible to listen to live audio in the Smart Client Events and output About input and output Hardware input such as door sensors can be attached to input ports on hardware devices Input from such external hardware input units can be used for generating events in XProtect Professional Hardware output units can be attached to output ports on many hardware devices allowing you to activate lights sirens and more from XProtect Professional Such hardware output can be activated automatically by events or manually from clients Before you specify use of hardware input and hardware output units on a hardware device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the hardware device Most hardware devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also chec
111. alarm images field this field indirectly allows you to control how long before the event you want to receive pre alarm images from Only available if e mail notification see Configure e mail notifications on page 165 is enabled Select if XProtect Professional should automatically send an e mail when the event occurs Recipients are defined as part of the e mail notification configuration When using e mail notifications also bear in mind individual cameras scheduling see E mail notification on page 156 Only available if e mail notification see Configure e mail notifications on page 165 is enabled Select to include an image Attach image from camera recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail notification then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send e mail if this event occurs Only available if SMS notification see Configure SMS notifications on page 168 is enabled Select if XProtect Professional should automatically send an SMS when the event Send SMS if this event occurs occurs Recipients are defined as part of the SMS notification configuration When using SMS notifications also bear in mind individual cameras scheduling see SMS notification on page 156 Delete Delete a selected event When a specific hardware input event is selected clicking Add will Add add a timer event on page 129 to the selected hardware input event www milestonesys com 136 Advance
112. ameras To select several cameras at a time press CTRL or SHIFT while selecting When you select a camera you will see a preview from that camera If you select several cameras you will see a preview from the last camera you select A green area in the preview indicates motion Adjust the Sensitivity slider so that irrelevant background noise is filtered out and only real motion is shown in green Alternatively specify a value between 0 and 256 in the field next to the slider to control the sensitivity setting Sensitivity The slider determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded as motion With a high sensitivity very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion The more you drag the slider to the left the more of the preview becomes green This is because with high sensitivity even the slightest pixel change is regarded as motion www milestonesys com 67 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Adjust the Motion slider so that motion detection is only triggered by the required level of motion The selected motion level is indicated by the black vertical line in the Level bar above the sliders The black vertical line serves as a threshold When motion is above to the right of the selected level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive motion detection Motion Alternatively specify a value between 0 and 10000 in the field on the le
113. ameras and you want to change the recording path archiving path and retention time for all of them Instead of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times you can simply enter them once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Apply only a selected value from the template to selected cameras Tip To select more than one value press CTRL while selecting Apply all values from the template to selected cameras The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V Regular frame rate properties Frame Rate Live Frame Rate Recording Frame Rate Time Unit www milestonesys com Required average frame rate for video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour Required average frame rate for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour If the cam
114. ames Is the Analytics Event feature enabled Is the IP address host name of the machine sending the event s allowed listed on the analytics events address list Error resolving the local host name Solution Explanation The IP address host name of the machine cannot be found or is invalid Analytics event is not used in any Is the analytics event used actively in alarm definition Solution Explanation any alarm definitions Use the analytics event in an alarm definition Did sending a test event to the Event See table below Server succeed Error messages and solutions for the condition Send analytics event www milestonesys com 134 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Event Server not found Error connecting to Event Server Error sending analytics event Error receiving response from Event Server Analytics event unknown by Event Server Invalid analytics event received by Event Server Sender unauthorized by Event Server Internal error in Event Server Invalid response received from Event Server Unknown response from Event Server Unexpected error Hardware input event Administrator s Manual Unable to find the Event Server service on the list of registered services Unable to connect to the Event Server service on the defined port most likely due to network problems the Event Server service being stopped or similar Connection to the Event Ser
115. an use beyond the maximum allowed number of cameras for a single server In such a setup clients will still have a single point of contact they connect to the master server but also get access transparently to cameras and recordings on the slave servers Matrix A feature enabling the control of live camera views on remote computers for distributed viewing Once configured Matrix triggered live video can be viewed in the Smart Client Matrix recipient A computer equipped with Smart Client software and therefore capable of displaying Matrix triggered live video MJPEG Motion JPEG compressed video format where each frame is a separately compressed JPEG image The method used is quite similar to the I frame method used for MPEG but no interframe prediction is used This allows for somewhat easier editing and makes 218 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 compression independent of the amount of motion Monitor 1 A computer screen 2 An application used in previous versions of XProtect Professional for recording and displaying video The Monitor application has been discontinued MPEG Compression standards and file formats for digital video developed by the Moving Pictures Experts Group MPEG standards use so called lossy compression as they store only the changes between frames removing often considerable amounts of redundant information Keyframes stored at specified intervals record
116. anges made during editing Available only if you have edited the properties of an existing Matrix recipient Adds the new Matrix recipient to the list Available only if you have added properties of a new Matrix recipient in the Name Address Port Password and possibly Smart Client fields 159 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Matrix event control Administrator s Manual The Matrix Event Control tab is used for configuring the automatic sending of live video based on predefined events You can define exactly which events and cameras to use on a per Matrix recipient basis The Matrix Event Control tab displays the list of Matrix recipients defined on the Matrix Recipients tab Right clicking a Matrix recipient brings up a list of devices with belonging events When you select an event it will initially be highlighted by a red exclamation mark indicating that there is additional configuration to be done Right clicking an event brings up a list of options for the selected event Delete selected event Connect Disconnect then connect Disconnect Deletes selected event on selected device Connects to the camera actual camera is specified after selecting action to be taken Disconnect any existing connections then connect again With this option the live video will appear in the Matrix recipient on a first in first out basis Each time a new event occurs video from the latest ev
117. anning the subnet on which the XProtect Professional server is located To add additional ranges or edit existing ones click the Add or Edit button as required then specify Start address Specify the first IP address in the required range www milestonesys com 47 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Specify the last IP address in the required range The start and end End address IP address may be identical allowing you to only scan for a single hardware device If scanning for hardware devices which support TCP HTTP most Les Wel OST Sez devices do keep the check box selected Port number s on which to scan If you want to scan on more than one port number separate them by commas example 80 88 90 If you want to scan on a range of port numbers separate the first and last port number in the range by a colon example 80 90 will scan on all ports from 80 up to and including 90 You can also combine GE S on port individual port numbers and ranges example 77 80 90 97 99 number s Default is port 80 If your hardware devices are located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall you may need to specify a different port number When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the port and IP addresses used by the hardware devices Then select which drivers to use when scanning By default XProtect Professional will use all known drivers If your organiz
118. anual Professional 8 1 Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of speedup on event requires that events have been defined and that you select On event start and stop events in the neighboring lists Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields Select required start event The camera will begin using the SI Eont speedup frame rates when the start event occurs Select required stop event The camera will return to the normal Sop Erani frame rates when the stop event occurs Tip Speedup does not necessarily have to be based on motion or events you can also use scheduling see Speedup on page 156 to configure speedup based on particular periods of time If you prefer such time based speedup you should still enable the use of speedup by selecting the Enable speedup check box Dual stream This feature is only available on cameras supporting dual stream This additional stream feature lets you use the alternative stream of the camera It enables two independent streams to the recording server a stream for live viewing and another stream for recording purposes with different resolution encoding and frame rate Enable dedicated live stream Select the type of the live stream Stream settings for viewing live Stream video and for recording video may very well
119. are device and firmware used You do not have to configure hardware input units separately any hardware input units connected to hardware devices are automatically detected when you add the hardware devices to XProtect Professional The same goes for hardware output but hardware output does require some simple configuration in XProtect Professional If you want to configure hardware output and automatically trigger output when events occur so that for example lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected in video see Add a hardware output on page 127 and Configure hardware output on event on page 130 When you are ready to configure events see Add a hardware input event on page 127 Add a generic event on page 129 and Add a manual event on page 128 If you want to use timer events with your other events see Add a timer event on page 129 www milestonesys com 126 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Add an analytics event To add an analytics event do the following 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Events and Output right click Analytics Events and select Create New 2 Specify required properties see Analytics event on page 133 3 Click OK 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Add a hardware input event With hardware input eve
120. ased on motion detection settings in XProtect Professional This type of hardware input events is also called system motion detection events or VMD Video Motion Detection events In earlier XProtect Professional versions VMD events were an event type of their own now they are simply considered a type of hardware input event Hardware output units can be attached to output ports on many hardware devices allowing you to activate lights sirens and more from XProtect Professional Such hardware output can be activated automatically by events or manually from clients Hardware output www milestonesys com 125 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Events may be generated manually by the users selecting them in their clients These events are called manual events Manual events can be of the type Global events or Timer events Global events apply to all hardware whereas timer events are separate events triggered by the hardware input event manual event or generic event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes typically for stopping previously triggered actions Manual events Example A camera starts recording based on a hardware input event for example when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording a
121. ate on all of them you can simply enter it once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras Apply Template Select All Clear All www milestonesys com Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column 65 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Apply template on selected Lets you apply the value from the template to selected cameras cameras Adjust Motion Detection wizard The Adjust Motion Detection wizard helps you quickly configure your cameras motion detection properties Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time Therefore we recommended stopping see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when configuring such devices for motion detection and PTZ See also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 Pages in this wizard Exoludo Ce Le EE 66 Moton BIEN 67 Exclude regions Exclude regions let you disable motion detection in specific areas of cameras views Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detectio
122. ation as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V Select required default microphone Camera Name Default Microphone Tip Note that you can select microphones or speakers attached to another hardware device than the selected camera Default Speaker Select required default speaker Click the Open button to configure detailed and or camera specific Camera settings such as event notification PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas for the selected camera Select All Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Clear All Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Set selected template value on Apply only a selected value from the template to selected cameras selected cameras Tip To select more than one value press CTRL while selecting Set all template values on REESE Apply all values from the template to selected cameras www milestonesys com 99 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Storage information The storage information lets you view how much storage space you have on your XProtect Professional system and not least how much of it is free Drive Letter representing the drive in question for example C Path Path to where you save the files for example C or OurServer OurFolder OurSu
123. ation only uses certain hardware device makes and or models you can achieve faster scanning by selecting only the drives required for those hardware devices If that is the case click Select then in the Select Drivers to Use for IP Scan select the drivers you want to use when scanning Tip The list of drivers is typically very long and by default all drivers are selected With the Select All and Clear All buttons you can avoid having to select clear all check boxes manually Next add user name password combinations required to access the administrator account on each of your hardware devices The administrator account gives full access and XProtect Professional will need that for each hardware device User name for the hardware device s administrator account Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer s default user names for their hardware devices If that is the case in your organization select default do not type a manufacturer s default user name as this can be a source of error trust that XProtect User name Professional will know the manufacturer s default user name Other typical user names such as admin or root are also selectable from the list If you want a user name which is not on the list simply type a new user name Tip User names you enter will subsequently be added to the list SO you can easily select them later www milestonesys com 48 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Prof
124. atively If allowed in your organization you should therefore disable any virus scanning of affected areas such as camera databases etc on the XProtect Professional server as well as on any archiving destinations Time server recommended All images are time stamped by XProtect Professional upon reception but since cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc camera time and XProtect Professional system time may not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion If your cameras supports timestamps we recommend that you auto synchronize camera and system time through a time server for consistent synchronization www milestonesys com 24 Before you start Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 For information about how to configure a time server try searching www microsoft com see htto www microsoft com http www microsoft com for time server time service or similar www milestonesys com 25 Before you start Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Install and upgrade About installing surveillance server software or XProtect Smart Client silently If you are a surveillance system administrator you can deploy the XProtect Smart Client or XProtect Professional to users computers by using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server SMS Such tools let you build up databases of hardware and software
125. ator s Manual Enable recording on the camera when Start cameras on client requests see the previous is also selected If a user does not have access to manual recording see Camera access on page 181 selecting Enable recording when started on client request will not enable the user to do manual recording Select which online schedule profile to use as default for cameras you subsequently add to your XProtect Professional system Note that your selection only applies for the online schedule not for any other schedules Default selection is Always on meaning that new cameras will always be online that is transferring video to the XProtect Professional server for live viewing and further processing Control the aggressiveness of reconnection attempts If XProtect Professional loses the connection to a camera it will by default attempt to re establish the connection after ten seconds In some environments for example if using vehicle mounted cameras through wireless connections camera connections may frequently be lost and you may want to change the aggressiveness of such reconnection attempts You can view live and even record video from a camera outside its online recording schedule To do this you select the Start cameras on client requests and if needed the Enable recording when started on client request options in the following when setting up your scheduling properties for the camera in question Archiving XProtect
126. atrolling profile is followed immediately by use of another run your mouse pointer over the red bar to see which patrolling profile applies when XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required 1 In the Schedule Profiles list select Add new 2 Inthe Add Profile dialog enter a name for the profile Names must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V 2 3 In the top right corner of the dialog select Set camera to start stop on time to base subsequent settings on periods of time or Set camera to start stop on event to base subsequent settings on events within periods of time Tip You can combine the two so you may return to this step in order to toggle between the two options 4 n the calendar section place your mouse pointer at a required start point then hold down the left mouse button drag the mouse pointer and release at the required end point o You specify each day separately o You specify time in increments of five minutes XProtect Professional helps you by showing the time over which your mouse pointer is positioned If you base your schedule profile or parts of it on events within p
127. avigation features for moving a PTZ camera to particular preset positions A user group will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined preset positions PTZ preset positions www milestonesys com 181 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Output Events Incoming audio Outgoing audio Manual recording AVI JPEG export Database export Sequences Smart search Recorded audio Administrator s Manual Activate output lights sirens door openers etc related to the selected camera s Use manually triggered events related to the selected camera s This feature is available in the XProtect Smart Client only Listen to incoming audio from microphones related to the selected camera s This feature is available in the Smart Client only Talk to audiences through speakers related to the selected camera s This feature is available in the XProtect Smart Client only Manually start recording for a fixed time defined see Manual recording on page 92 by the surveillance system administrator Export evidence as movie clips in AVI format and as still images in JPEG format Export evidence in database format This feature is available in the Smart Client only Use the Sequences feature when playing back video from the selected camera Use the smart search feature with which users can search for motion in one or more selected areas of ima
128. avoid automatically triggered warnings from your e mail client Such warnings may otherwise inform you that your e mail client is trying to automatically send e mail messages on your behalf TLS Transport Layer Security and it s predecessor SSL Secure Socket Layer is not supported if the sender belongs on a server that requires TLS or SSL e mail notifications will not work properly Also you may be required to disable any e mail scanners that could prevent the application sending the e mail notifications Select check box if a user name and password is required to use the SMTP server Only required when Server requires login is selected Specify the user name required for using the SMTP server Only required when Server requires login is selected Specify the password required for using the SMTP server 167 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 SMS About SMS With SMS notifications you can instantly get notified on your mobile device when your surveillance system requires attention XProtect Professional can automatically send SMS notifications when e Motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected e Events occur You can select individually for each event whether you want to receive an SMS notification or not e Archiving see About archiving on page 143 fails if an SMS notification has been selected as part of the archiving properties
129. basic user you must therefore do the following Start the Management Application and go to File gt Logout This will open a login dialog where you can use your basic user ID to log in Master slave properties If you have several XProtect Professional servers you can create a master slave setup A master slave setup will allow users to connect in a transparent way to more than one server simultaneously When users connect to the master server they will instantly get access to the slave servers as well Master server properties Enable as master server Select to enable as master server Timeout Set timeout of slave update See Update Status on Slaves in the following Add Lets you add slave servers Select Master Server in the list and click the Add button Slave server properties Address IP address of the slave server Port Port number of the slave server Remove a slave server from the list of slave servers Select the Delete slave server in the list and click the Delete button When selecting Master Server the Delete button is disabled and the Add button is enabled provided that Enable as master server is selected allowing you to add slave servers to the master server but preventing you from deleting the master server Update status on slaves In the Master Settings Summary and Slave Settings Summary table area it is possible to verify update added slaves by clicking Update Status A status dialog will run and su
130. be affected if the server is damaged stolen or otherwise affected Remember that a backup is a snapshot of your XProtect Professional system configuration at the time of backing up If you later change your configuration your backup will not reflect the most recent changes Therefore back up your system configuration regularly www milestonesys com 200 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Tip When you back up your configuration as described the backup will include restore points see Restore system configuration from a restore point on page 206 This allows you to not only restore the backed up configuration but also to revert to an earlier point in that configuration if required Restore system configuration 1 If XProtect Professional is used on a server running Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 copy the content of the backed up Milestone Surveillance folder into C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data MilestoneMilestone Surveillance If XProtect Professional is used on a server running any other supported operating system copy the content of the backed up Milestone Surveillance folder into C Program Data Milestone Milestone Surveillance If you backed up the file devices ini copy the file into C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance devices Back up and restore Alarms configuration It is important that you regularly back up your XProt
131. be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available If not the archive drive s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived IMPORTANT You will lose the archive data being deleted Same drive Automatic moving or deletion of archives if drive runs out of disk space If the XProtect Professional server is running out of disk space and the archiving drive is identical to the camera database drive XProtect Professional will automatically do the following in an attempt to free up disk space 1 First the program will attempt to move archives moving archives is only possible if you use dynamic archiving with which you can archive to several different drives This will happen if o thereis less than 1596 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 40 GB plus 2 GB per camera Or o the available disk space goes below 225 MB plus 30 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 525 MB 225 MB plus 30 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 1596 disk space left 2 If moving archives is not possible XProtect Professional will attempt to delete the oldest archives This will happen if o thereis less than 109
132. bfolder U What the storage area is used for for example recording or sage ub archiving Drive Size Total size of the drive Video Data Amount of video data on the drive Other Data Amount of other data on the drive Free Space Amount of unused space left on the drive Tip To quickly view disk space usage in a pie chart format select the line representing the drive you are interested in Camera properties Properties in this window General eate aiat drei d eie deiiGaie duis 100 P4 101 fom E 104 aeeoeia e PEA E 105 Recording and archiving Gates 106 UR e EE 109 ee ET 110 Motion detection A exclude regions sse 110 Privacy MASKING EE 112 BOO IONS EE 112 HIE 113 Ee de EE 115 PTZ pattolling EE 117 PTZ ON GVON deiei 120 General When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras properties include www milestonesys com 100 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Cameras are by default enabled meaning that provided they are scheduled to be online see Online period on page 155 they are Enabled able to transfer video to XProtect Professional If required you can disable an individual camera in which case no video audio will be transferred from the camera source to XProtect Professional The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as in clients You can
133. blish the connection between the XProtect Mobile client and XProtect Professional Install XProtect Mobile client 1 Access Google Play or App Store on your device 2 Search for and download the application XProtect Mobile 3 Once the download of the application is completed the XProtect Mobile client application is ready for use on your mobile device For detailed information about how to set up your XProtect Mobile client visit the Milestone website at www milestonesys com www milestonesys com 16 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 XProtect Web Client About XProtect Web Client XProtect Web Client is a web based and touch enabled surveillance solution that provides users access to view live video play back recorded video print and export evidence and more access to features depend on individual user rights In order to use XProtect Web Client with XProtect Professional you must add a Mobile server see About Mobile server on page 184 to establish the connection between the XProtect Web Client and XProtect Professional Access XProtect Web Client If you have an XProtect Mobile server see About Mobile server on page 184 installed on your computer you can use the XProtects Web Client to access your cameras and views Since you do not need to install XProtect Web Client you can access it from the local computer on which you installed the XProtect Mobile server or any ot
134. bsequently inform you of the status of your slave server s Users About users The term users primarily refers to users who connect to the surveillance system through their clients You can configure such users in two ways www milestonesys com 176 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e As baste users authenticated by a user name password combination e As Windows users authenticated based on their Windows login You can add both types of users through the Configure User Access wizard on page 68 or individually see Add basic users on page 177 and Add Windows users on page 177 By grouping users you can specify rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 for all users within a group in one go If you have many users performing similar tasks this can save you significant amounts of work User groups are logical groups created and used for practical purposes in the Management Application only They are not in any way connected with user groups from central directory services If you want to use groups make sure you add groups see Add user groups on page 178 before you add users You cannot add existing users to groups Finally the Administrators group is also listed under Users This is a default Windows user group for administration purpose which automatically has access to the Management Application Add basic users When you add a basic user you
135. cally during the initial installation of your XProtect Professional system New versions of video device drivers known as XProtect Device Pack are released from time to time and made available for free on the Milestone website We recommend that you always use the latest version of video device drivers When you update video device drivers you can install the latest version on top of any version you may have installed IMPORTANT When you install new video device drivers your system cannot communicate with camera devices from the moment you begin the installation until the moment installation is complete and you have restarted the Recording Server service Usually the process takes no longer than a few minutes but it is highly recommended that you perform the update at a time when you do not expect important incidents to take place 1 Onthe XProtect Professional server on which you want to install the new video device drivers version shut down any running surveillance software including any running Recording Server Service 2 Run the XProtect Device Pack installation file and follow the wizard 3 When the wizard is complete remember to start the Recording Server service again If you use the Add Hardware Devices Wizard s Import from CSV File on page 51 option you must if cameras and server are offline specify a HardwareDriverlD for each hardware device you want to add To view a current list of IDs view the release notes for the
136. can communicate with XProtect Professional If required you can disable individual cameras or microphones speaker to prevent them from communicating with XProtect Professional All cameras etc get automatically generated names based on their type plus a number examples Camera 1 Microphone 26 Such names are shown in the Name column If required you change names manually or select another name format in the Auto generated name format list i The default name format Device type number Example Camera 1 Names will consist of a text of your choice specified in the Custom Custom text Device type text field followed by a dash type information and a number number Example Airport Security Camera 1 Names will consist of the hardware device address followed by a Address Device type dash type information and a number number Example 10 10 123 73 Camera 1 www milestonesys com 46 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Names will consist of a text of your choice specified in the Custom Custom text Address text field followed by a dash then the hardware device address Device type number followed by a dash type information and a number Example Airport Security 10 10 123 73 Camera 1 Names will consist of hardware device model information followed Hardware model Device type py a dash type information and a number number Example Axis P1311 Camera 1
137. cator an address of a resource on the World Wide Web The first part of a URL specifies which protocol or data communication standard to use when accessing the resource whereas the second part of the URL specifies the domain or IP address at which the resource is located For example www milestonesys com V VCA Video content analysis VCA is a system that detects various types of previously specified behavior both of humans and vehicles A VCA based system provides third party video content analysis spanning from face recognition over advanced motion detection to complex behavioral analysis VCA systems and their output can seamlessly be integrated with the Alarms feature and used for for example triggering alarms Here the events resulting from VCA systems are called analytics events Third party VCA tools are developed by independent partners delivering solutions based on an a Milestone open platform These solutions can impact performance on XProtect Professional Video encoder A device typically a standalone device that can stream video from a number of connected client cameras Video encoders contain image digitizers making it possible to connect analog cameras to a network www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Video server Another name for a video encoder View In XProtect Professional a collection of video from one or more cameras presented together in the Smart Client A view
138. ce Trial or Expired Video Channels Number of available video channels on your hardware devices Number of video channels on each of your hardware devices for Bed channe S which you have a license Speaker Channels Number of available speaker channels on your hardware devices Microphone Channels dos of available microphone channels on your hardware Address http addresses of your hardware devices WWW Links to http addresses of your hardware devices Port Port used by your hardware devices Device Driver Names of device drivers associated with your hardware devices You can activate licenses online or offline On the Management Application s toolbar click File and either Activate License Online or Manage License Offline Cameras or dedicated input output boxes for which you are missing a license will not send data to the surveillance system Cameras added after all available licenses are used are unavailable About activating licenses When you purchase XProtect Professional you receive a temporary license file lic including a Software License Code SLC You must use this temporary license file when you install your system www milestonesys com 35 Licenses Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Also in order to get your permanent license you should register your SLC before you activate licenses When you have registered your SLC you can activate your licenses in two ways online or offline
139. ces Administrator s Manual Allows users of the Smart Client to e View alarms e Print alarms reports The following services are all automatically installed on the XProtect Professional server if you run a Typical installation By default services run transparently in the background on the XProtect Professional server If you need to you can start and stop services separately from the Management Application see Start and stop services on page 184 Milestone Recording Server service Milestone Image Server service Milestone Image Import service Milestone Log Check service Milestone Event Server service www milestonesys com A vital part of the surveillance system Video streams are only transferred to XProtect Professional while the Recording Server service is running Provides access to the surveillance system for users logging in with a Smart Client Note If the Image Server service is configured in Windows Services to log in with another account than the Local System account for example as a domain user Smart Clients on other computers than the surveillance server itself will not be able to log in to the server using the server s host name Instead those users must enter the server s IP address Used for fetching pre and post alarm images and storing the fetched images in camera databases Pre and post alarm images is a feature available for selected cameras only it enables sending of images from i
140. ch motion is detected or when an event occurs and until another event occurs Remember to select start and stop events in the neighboring columns Select required start event Recording will begin when the start event occurs or earlier if using pre recording see the following Select required stop event Recording will end when the stop event occurs or later if using post recording see the following You can store recordings from periods preceding detected motion and or start events Select check box to enable this feature Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring column How does pre and post recording work XProtect Professional receives video in a continuous stream from the camera whenever the camera is enabled and scheduled to be online This is what lets you view live video but it also means that XProtect Professional can easily store received video for a number of seconds in its memory a k a buffering If it turns out that the buffered video is needed for pre or post recording it is automatically appended to the recording If not it is simply discarded 88 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video from before recording start conditions that is motion or start event are met Usually only some seconds of pre recording is required but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of pre recording corr
141. check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure In that case the features will still be installed on the surveillance System server and by selecting check boxes in the tree structure you can quickly make the features available again e You can remove features which have previously been made available through the Download Manager This will remove the installation of the features on the surveillance system server The features will disappear from the Download Manager but installation files for the features will be kept in the surveillance system server s Installers or relevant language folder so you can re install them later if required 1 Inthe Download Manager click Remove features 2 Inthe Remove Features window select the features you want to remove 3 Click OK and then click Yes Updates Milestone Systems A S regularly releases service updates for its products offering improved functionality and support for new devices If you are a surveillance system administrator we recommend that you check www milestonesys com for updates at regular intervals in order to make sure you are using the most recent version of your surveillance software www milestonesys com 21 Introduction Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Administrator s Manual Before you start Minimum system requirements Surveillance system server Operating system CPU RAM Network Graphics adapter Hard disk type Hard disk space
142. click the Add button below the list 3 Specify required properties see Hardware input event on page 135 4 Click OK 5 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar For information about how to configure automatic activation of hardware output when events occur see Configure hardware output on event on page 130 You configure output for manual activation in clients as well as for automatic activation on detected motion individually for each camera see Output on page 110 Add a manual event With manual events your users with required rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 can trigger events manually from their clients Manual events can be global shared by all cameras or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected You can use manual events for a wide variety of purposes for example e As start and stop events for use when scheduling cameras online periods see Online period on page 155 For example you can make a camera start or stop transferring video to the surveillance system based on a manual event e As start and stop events for controlling other camera settings For example you can make a camera use a higher frame rate based on a manual event or you can use a manual event for triggering PTZ on event on page 120 e For triggering output Particular output can be associated see Configure hardwar
143. cording properties see Recording on page 105 settings for the camera Motion detection is enabled as default Disabling it will improve CPU and RAM performance of your XProtect Professional system but will depending on your system settings also affect your motion detection event and alarm management In the following two tables You can see the differences between enabling table 1 and disabling table 2 built in motion detection for a camera Enabled motion detection Always Yes Yes Never No Yes Built in Motion Detection Yes Yes www milestonesys com Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 78 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Built in Motion Detection amp Event or Yes Yes Yes Yes Event only Disabled motion detection Always Yes No Yes No Never No No Yes No Built in Motion Detection is bi ZER ND Built in Motion Detection amp Event or Yes depending No Yes depending No on settings on settings Event only About motion detection and PTZ cameras Motion detection generally works the same way for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras as it does for regular cameras However e Itis not possible to configure motion detection separately for each of a PTZ camera s preset positions e In order to activate unwanted recordings notifications etc motion detection is automatically disabled while a PTZ camera moves between two preset positions After a number of seconds t
144. ct Port which COM port on the video encoder to use for controlling the PTZ camera Available only if Moveable is selected in the Type column Lets you specify port address of the camera The port address will normally Port Address be 1 If using daisy chained PTZ cameras the port address will identify each of them and you should verify your settings with those recommended in the documentation for the camera Cameras and storage information About video and recording configuration Once you have added hardware devices and attached cameras you can configure video and recording settings in three ways e Wizard driven Guided configuration which lets you specify video recording and archiving settings for all your cameras See Configure Video and Recording wizard and Adjust Motion Detection wizard www milestonesys com 77 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Administrator s Manual e General Specify video recording and shared settings such as dynamic archiving paths and whether audio should be recorded or not for all your cameras o Inthe Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Cameras and Storage Information and select Properties e Camera specific Specify video recording and camera specific settings such as event notification PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas for each individual camera o Inthe Management Application navigation pane e
145. ct Go allows you to use up to eight cameras at the same time while XProtect Professional lets you use many more The number of cameras added will be inherited by the upgraded product but you must of course add any additional cameras to the Management Application yourself Upgrade from a previous version You can upgrade your entire XProtect Professional system configuration from one XProtect Professional version to another The following information applies if you upgrade from one XProtect Professional version to another and if you upgrade to XProtect Professional from a streamlined product in the XProtect product range Back up your current configuration When you install the new version of XProtect Professional it inherits the configuration from your previous version We recommend that you make regular backups of your server configuration as a disaster recovery measure You should also do this when you upgrade your server While it is rare that you lose your configuration cameras schedules views etc it can happen under unfortunate circumstances Fortunately it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration IMPORTANT If you are upgrading from XProtect Professional 6 5 or earlier you must back up your configuration before you upgrade The following describes backing up XProtect Professional 6 5 or earlier If you need information about how to back up configuration for XProtect Professional7 0 or newer see Back up syst
146. cted motion and or specified events Based on incoming video being buffered on the XProtect Professional server in case it is going to be needed for a motion or event triggered recording Using pre recording can be highly advantageous if for example you have defined that video should be recorded when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may also be important Privacy masking The ability to define if and how selected areas of a camera s view should be masked before distribution For example if an XProtect Professional camera films a street you can mask certain areas of a building for example windows and doors with privacy masking in order to protect residents privacy PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom highly movable and flexible type of camera PUK Personal Unblocking Key or PIN Unlock Key number used as an extra security measure for SIM cards www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Recording On IP video surveillance systems recording means saving video and if applicable audio from a camera in the cameraa s database on the surveillance system In many IP surveillance systems all the video audio received from cameras is not necessarily saved Saving of video and audio in a cameraa s database is in many cases started only when there is a reason to do so for example when motion is detected when an event occurs or when a specific period of tim
147. ction analysis should be carried out on video from the camera Specified in milliseconds The MotionDetectionInterval optio interval is applied regardless of the camera s frame rate settings If nal number specified as for example MotionDetectionInterval1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Name with which the XProtect Professional will appear when listed ServerName in clients Name must be unique and must not contain any of the following special characters lt gt amp V 2 Port number to use for communication between the XProtect ServerPort Professional server and clients If this parameter is used all online hardware devices found using HardwareOldMacAddress are updated All other hardware devices are not updated Any character means yes use online verification OnlineVerification Existing configuration parameters that are not specified in CSV file will remain unchanged If a parameter value for an individual camera in the CSV file is empty the existing parameter value will remain unchanged on that camera Most system integrators store hardware device information in spreadsheets like Microsoft Excel from which they can save the information as comma separated values in a CSV file These examples show hardware information in Excel 1 and when exported to a CSV file 2 note the header lines Whichever method is used the following applies e The
148. d Default is CAMediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can only specify a path to a folder on a local drive You cannot specify a path to a network drive If you use a network drive it is not be possible to save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable Recording Path If you change the recording path and you have existing recordings at the old location you are asked whether you want to move the recordings to the new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Tip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available you can improve performance by distributing individual cameras databases across several drives Click button to delete all recordings in the database for the camera Archived recordings will not be affected Delete Database IMPORTANT Use with caution All recordings in the database for the camera will be permanently deleted As a security measure you will be asked to confirm the deletion Only editable if not using dynamic paths for archiving see About archiving on page 143 Path to the folder in which the camera s archived recordings should be stored Default is C MediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can specify a path to a local or network drive If X you change the archiving path and there are existing archived Archiving Path recordings at t
149. d viewing of 360 degree images FPS Frames per second measurement indicating the amount of information contained in a motion video Each frame represents a still image but when frames are displayed in succession the illusion of motion is created The higher the FPS the smoother the motion appears Note however that a high FPS may also lead to a large file size when video is saved Frame rate A measurement indicating the amount of information contained in motion video typically measured in FPS FTP File Transfer Protocol standard for exchanging files across the internet FTP uses the TCP IP standards for data transfer and is often used for uploading or downloading files to and from servers G Generic events XProtect Professional can receive and analyze input in the form of TCP or UDP data packages which if they match specified criteria can be used to generate events Such events are called generic events 216 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 GOP Group of pictures individual frames grouped together forming a video motion sequence Grace period When you install XProtect Professional configure the system and add recording servers and cameras XProtect Professional runs on temporary licenses These need to be activated before a certain period ends This is the grace period GSM Global System for Mobile communications a standard for mobile telephony GUID Gl
150. d configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Hardware output When you add hardware output see Add a hardware output on page 127 specify the following properties Specify a name If you are going to make the hardware output available for manual activation in clients this is the name that client users will see Names must be unique and must not contain any of Output name these special characters lt gt amp Some cameras only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Select which of the hardware device s output ports the output is Output connected to connected to Many hardware devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Lets you specify the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Keep output for Some hardware devices are only able to apply output for a relatively short time for example for up to five seconds Refer to the documentation for the hardware device in question for exact information Tip To verify that your hardware output works click the Test Output button Manual event When you add manual events see Add a manual event on page 128 specify the following properties Contains a Global node and a list of all defined cameras You can configure as many
151. define this type of schedule patrolling must be configured for the cameras in question Only available for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras with patrolling the continuous movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset positions Lets you select the required profile for the PTZ patrolling schedule see PTZ patrolling on page 156 for the PTZ Patrolling camera s in question You specify a camera s patrolling schedule based on patrolling profiles within particular periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in red Lza zs Use of one patrolling profile may be followed immediately by use of another example use the Daytime patrolling profile Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 then the Evening patrolling profile Mondays from 17 45 until 23 00 Use of two patrolling profiles cannot overlap Unlike other types of scheduling there are no ready made Always on and Always off schedule profiles for PTZ patrolling You can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile see Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required Matrix About Matrix video sharing The Matrix feature allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera to any Matrix recipient on a network operating with XProtect Professional A computer on which Matrix triggered video can be viewed is known as a Matrix recipient In order
152. e 4 Next you receive the updated permanent license file lic from Milestone via e mail Save it to a location accessible from the Management Application Step 2 Import license offline When you have received your permanent license file lic from Milestone via e mail and saved it to a location accessible from the Management Application you are ready to import it to your surveillance System Tip The following procedure is also used for changing SLC licenses 1 Onthe Management Application s toolbar click File Manage License Offline Import License and select your saved lic file to import it 2 When the permanent license file is successfully imported click OK Activate by using both step 1 and 2 in this process each time you add a new device Change SLC If you need to change your SLC and you have received a new permanent license file lic from Milestone via e mail and saved it to a location accessible from the Management Application you are ready to import it to your surveillance system 1 Onthe Management Application s toolbar click File Manage License Offline Import License and select your saved lic file to import it 2 When the new permanent license file is successfully imported click OK www milestonesys com 38 Licenses Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 About replacing cameras You can replace a camera that is licensed in XProtect Professional and have the new camera
153. e Enable internet access following fields When using public access the router or firewall used must be configured so requests sent to the public IP address and port are forwarded to the local inside IP address and port of the XProtect Professional server Local port Lets you specify a public IP address or hostname for use when the Internet address XProtect Professional server should be available from the internet Specify a port number for use when the XProtect Professional Internet port should be available from the Internet The default port number is 80 You can change the port number if needed www milestonesys com 172 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 You can limit the number of clients allowed to connect at the same time Depending on your XProtect Professional configuration and the performance of the hardware and network used limiting the number of simultaneously connected clients may help reduce server load If more than the allowed number of simultaneously connected clients attempt to log in only the allowed number of clients will be allowed access Any clients in excess of the allowed number will receive an error message when attempting to log in By default a maximum of ten simultaneously connected clients are allowed To specify a different maximum number simply overwrite Max number of clients the value Tip To allow an unlimited number of simultaneously c
154. e 195 3 Click OK 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Configure analytics events in alarms Analytics events see Overview of events and output on page 125 are typically data received from external third party video content analysis VCA see VCA on page 222 providers An example of a VCA based system could be an access control system Alarms properties Properties in this window Alarms derlihitlon aeterne er SEENEN nene in enia nha SERM Rua eiu 195 Alarm data settmgs enne 197 So nd Settings eee 198 Time ele LU 199 Alarms definition When you configure Alarm definitions see Add an alarm on page 195 specify the following www milestonesys com 195 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Enable Name Description Triggering event Sources Time profile Event based Time Limit Events triggered www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Enables the Alarms feature Enter a name The alarm s name will appear whenever the alarm is listed Tip Alarm names do not have to be unique but using unique and descriptive alarm names are advantageous in many situations Enter a description optional This list offers both system related events and plug ins You can select the event message which should be used when the alarm is triggered Select which cameras and or oth
155. e EE 166 SMS mc daaa 168 About SMS isai E 168 Configure SMS notifications csecccceeeeeseeeeeeceseeeenseeeeeeesesnaeseseeeseeneeseeseseaeseseeeenseenss 168 E Teen ivairius ennui enaint e udian akiden ideaa Sini ie unae enua anieri eat 168 CENTRAL E 170 About XProtect Centr l 1 e n ener eoe ch iato EES 170 Enable XProtect Central eese eiseeeeeeeeeeen seen nena tnnn nn nn ania sinn nsn nnana 170 Central properties eebe 170 SERVER ACCESS uad cad HarL NEU KON MN S TUNIS I DE RUN 171 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e e EE 171 About registered services ecelesie esses eeeeen enenatis 171 Configure server access eeseeseeeeeseesees seen n nn nnnn in tn aan na natnm nsn tR assa nass sss asm Rasa nnns 171 Server access properties crore cette aaa e eaaa ENEE 172 MASTER SLAVE u csisisanktuas sen anEE FE DEKA REM EE EUN EEREEEIEM ENS CA EUNE RAN GRM URN Raana 174 About master and slave eeeeseseeeeeseseeeee esee enne ennt nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn nnna 174 Configure master and slave servers esee eeenee enne nnne tnnt nnn 174 Master slave properties eeeeeseeeeenee enne nne enne nnne nnn nnne nnn nnne nn nnmnnn nnmnnn innen
156. e begins Recording is then stopped after a specified amount of time for example when motion is no longer detected when an event occurs or when a time period ends The term recording originates from the analog video era when images were taped only when the record button was pressed Recording Server service Windows service without any user interface used by XProtect Professional for recording and displaying video Video is only transferred to the surveillance system while the Recording Server service is running Restore point Restore points allow you to return to a previous configuration state When a configuration change is applied in XProtect Professional a restore point is created If something goes wrong in your configuration you can browse through restore points and return to a suitable one S SCS A file extension scs for a script type targeted at controlling clients SDK Software Development Kit programming package enabling software developers to 220 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 create applications for use with a specific platform SIM Subscriber identity module circuit stored on a small card inserted into a mobile phone or computer or other mobile device The SIM card is used to identify and authenticate the user SLC Software license code product registration code required for using the XProtect Professional software If you do not have system admi
157. e for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate Live Frame Rate specified under normal mode If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second Recording Frame Rate minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode Select required unit for live and recording frame rates per second minute or hour Note that you can only select time bases that let Time Unit you speed up frame rates Example If you have specified 15 frames per second in normal mode you cannot specify 16 frames per minute or hour in speedup mode www milestonesys com 95 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Speedup On Schedule Only Start Event Stop Event Camera Frame Rate MPEG Administrator s Manual e Motion Detection Select this to speed up when motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected Normal frame rates will be resumed immediately after the last motion is detected e Event Select this to speed up when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of speedup on ev
158. e is likely to become full earlier if you record audio and video than if you only record video The fact that the database becomes full is not in itself a problem since XProtect Professional automatically archives see About archiving on page 143 data if the database becomes full However you may need additional archiving space if you record audio o Example If you use MPEG4 each one second video GOP Group Of Pictures will be stored in one record in the database Each second of audio will also be stored in one record in the database This reduces the database s video storage capacity to half its capacity because half of the database s records is used for storing audio Consequently the database runs full sooner and automatic archiving takes place more often than if you were only recording video o Example If you use MJPEG audio is stored in one record for every JPEG for as long as the audio block size does not exceed the time between the JPEGs In extreme cases this reduces the database s video storage capacity to half its capacity because half of the database s records is used for storing audio If you use very high frame rates which means less time between each JPEG a smaller portion of the database is used for storing audio records and consequently a larger portion is available for storing video The result is that the database runs full sooner and automatic archiving takes place more often than if you were only recording video
159. e methods are Automatic Windows Only or Basic Only www milestonesys com 187 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 All cameras view Output and events Keyframes only Enabled Log file location Keep logs for CPU usage Internal bandwidth External bandwidth Check every Administrator s Manual Enable disable viewing of All Cameras view This view contains all cameras on a recording server user rights permitting Enable disable output and events Enable disable video stream to stream key frames only Enabling key frames only reduces bandwidth usage Enable disable logging of XProtect Mobile client actions in a separate log file Path to where log files are saved Number of days to keep logs for default 3 days Default level of CPU usage which will trigger a warning in the log Default internal bandwidth usage which will trigger a warning in the log Default external bandwidth usage which will trigger a warning in the log Default time frame 30 sec for checking warning levels Note that every time you change a setting in the Mobile server settings you must click the Apply button followed by the Save button Server status See the status details for your Mobile server The details are read only Server active since CPU usage Internal bandwidth External bandwidth User Name column State column Bandwidth Usage column www milestonesys com
160. e output on event on page 130 with manual events e For triggering event based e mail and or SMS notifications e n combinations For example a manual event could make a camera start transferring video to the surveillance system while an output is triggered and an e mail notification is sent to relevant people To add a manual event do the following 1 In the Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration then expand Events and Output Right click Manual Events and select Add New Manual Event 2 Inthe list in the left side of the Manual Event Properties select global or a camera as required www milestonesys com 128 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 3 Click the add button and specify required properties see Hardware input event on page 135 When ready click OK or click the Add button again to add a timer event on page 129 to the event you have just created 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Add a generic event XProtect Professional can analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger events when specified criteria are met This way you can easily integrate your XProtect Professional surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems and alarm systems and more Events based on the analysis
161. e sceox a a Ond Cima COR a du EORR Cin c oOwe o Tee od eu ties 27 UIEGEAD ot ege ee ee e Sek Hehe Me He Hehe EN EN HE HENN MEN eeh He EN 28 About pqradilig ee 28 Upgrade from a previous version eese eene nnne nnne nnn nnn nnne nnn nnn nns 28 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVERS 4e eene nennen nnn n nhan nean hann aaa a aaa aane aaa eaa naa n anna 29 Iniz 55 7 BERE COPERTO A 30 GETTING STARTED WE 31 GET YOUR SYSTEM UP AND RUNNING eene enne nnn nnne nnn enhn n nn na nnn anna nnn 31 USE THE BUILT IN HELP SYSTEM e eee eene nnne nnne nan n nnne a nna nnne ennnen 33 LICENSES pte c 34 ABOUT LICENSES E 34 OVERVIEW OF LICENSE INFORMATION e eee enne nenne nana nne a nn nnn ean nnmnnn nenna 35 ABOUT ACTIVATINGEICENSES E 35 About activating licenses after grace period eere 36 Register SUG 8 eT eee EE 36 Activate License Online roce cde cecenssced ence eon cce een C ck no sucdecsssddeenes suaceesseaacoces 37 Activate License Offline 1 erre sooe REENEN RENE 37 Change Re 38 ABOUT REPLACING CAMERAS cccssccceeseecenseeceaseecensesenasenenasesenasesennsesonssenenseens 39 ZGEREIKGCHIEHNISSE THINES eseu egene A0 ABOUT PRIVACY e ale A0 DISABLE INFORMATION COL
162. each hardware device If the same password is used for all the hardware devices use the Password field below the list then click the Set on All button which becomes available when you specify a password in the field Tip If you are in doubt about which user name password to use ask yourself Have previously used a web page to connect to the hardware device and view video While did this was also able to configure camera settings such as resolution etc If you can answer yes to both questions you were probably using the hardware device s administrator account in which case you will also know the user name password If still in doubt look in the XProtect Device Pack release notes 5 When you have specified a password for all hardware devices on the list except unwanted devices click Next This will verify that all passwords are correct and mark each device in the Verified column If any hardware devices cannot be verified make sure you have specified the correct passwords 6 Click Next The next wizard page provides you with an overview where you can select names for cameras etc Overview and names The wizard provides you with a detailed overview listing each camera and microphone speaker attached to the hardware devices All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited All cameras etc are by default enabled selected in the Enable column This means that they
163. ecified that the received package should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the received package contains the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday since your two required terms are contained in the received package e Match In order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in the Event message expression field and nothing else Only available if e mail notification see Configure e mail notifications on page 165 is enabled Select if XProtect Professional should automatically send an e mail when the event occurs Recipients are defined as part of the e mail notification configuration When using e mail notifications also bear in mind individual cameras scheduling see E mail notification on page 156 Only available if e mail notification see Configure e mail notifications on page 165 is enabled Select to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail notification then select the required camera in the list next to the check box 141 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Send SMS if this event occurs Delete Add Administrator s Manual Only available if SMS notification see Configure SMS notifications on page 168 is enabled Select if XProtect Professional should automatically send an SMS when the event occurs Recipients are defined as part of the SMS notificat
164. ecordings so databases will never become full Basically the more you expect to record the more often you should archive You can also change the retention time which is the total amount of time you want to keep recordings from a camera recordings in the camera s database as well as any archived recordings under the properties of the individual camera XProtect Professional automatically archives recordings if a camera s database becomes full You only specify one time limit the retention time as part of the general Recording and Archiving paths on page 84 properties Note that retention time will determine when archiving takes place Retention time is the total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings from a camera that is recordings in the camera s database as well as any archived recordings Backup of archives Creating backups based on the content of camera databases is not recommended as it may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions Instead create backups based on the content of archives If you have not specified separate archiving locations for separate cameras you could back up the default local archiving directory Archives Important When you schedule a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with any scheduled archiving times If archiving fails Under rare circumstances archiving may fail for example due to network problems However in XProtect Professional this does not pose a threat
165. ect Professional Alarms configurations You do this by backing up the event server which handles your alarm and map configuration and also the Microsoft SQL Server Express database which stores your alarm data This enables you to restore your alarm and map configuration in a possible disaster recovery scenario Tip Backing up also has the added benefit that it flushes the SQL Server Express database s transaction log When you back up and restore Alarms configuration you must do it in the following order Prerequisites You must have administrator rights on the SQL Server Express database when you backup or restore your alarm configuration database on the SQL Server Express Once you are done backing up or restoring you only need to be a database owner of the SQL Server Express database Microsoft amp SQL Server Management Studio Express a tool you can download for free from www microsoft com downloads see http www microsoft com downloads http www microsoft com downloads Among its many features for managing SQL Server Express databases are some easy to use backup and restoration features Download and install the tool on your existing surveillance system server and on a possible future surveillance System server you will need it for backup as well as restoration Step 1 Stopping the Event Server service Stop the event server service to prevent configuration changes from being made 1 On your surveillance system se
166. ect if you want the server to be accessible from the internet through a router or firewall If you select this option you must also specify the public outside IP address and port number in the Internet access following fields When using public access the router or firewall must be configured so requests sent to the public IP address and port are forwarded to the local inside IP address and port of the XProtect Professional server Lets you specify a public IP address or hostname for use when the Internet address XProtect Professional server should be available from the internet Specify a port number for use when the XProtect Professional Internet port should be available from the Internet The default port number is 80 You can change the port number if needed Basic amp Windows Users You can add client users in two ways which may be combined e Basic user create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for each individual user To add a basic user specify required user name and password and click the Add Basic User button Repeat as required e Windows user import users defined locally on the server and authenticate them based on their Windows login This generally provides better security and is the recommended method The users must have been defined as local PC users on the server Simple file sharing must be disabled on the server Depending on your operati
167. ed structure complying with the W3C Extended Log File Format Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines e The header outlines the information contained in the log lines e The log lines consist of two main parts the log information itself as well as an encrypted part The encrypted part makes it possible through decryption and comparison to assert that a log file has not been tampered with Log integrity checks All log files except Management Application log files are subjected to an integrity check once every 24 hours The integrity check is performed by the XProtect Professional Log Check service The result of the integrity check is automatically written to a file named according to the structure LogCheck_YYYYMMDD log for example LogCheck 20091231 log Like the log files themselves the log check files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users folder for the operating system you are using Any inconsistencies will be reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file Possible error messages other non error messages may also appear in the log check file Log integrity information was not found Log integrity can t The log file could not be checked for integrity be guaranteed www milestonesys com 162 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Log information does not match integrity information The log file exists but does not c
168. elect the camera s you want to work with Note the last item in the list Rights for new cameras when added to the system with which you can allow the user group access to any future cameras Tip If the same features should be accessible for several cameras you can select multiple cameras by pressing SHIFT or CTRL on your keyboard while selecting For the selected camera s in the Access check box specify if the user group should have access to live viewing and playback at all If so specify if they should have access to both live viewing and playback and if this is the case which sub features should be available when working with the selected camera s The sub features are listed in two columns in the lower part of the window the left column lists features related to live viewing the right column lists features related to playback The Camera access settings check boxes work like a hierarchy of rights If the Access check box is cleared everything else is cleared and disabled If the Access check box is selected but for example the Live check box is cleared everything under the Live check box is cleared and disabled Depending on the selected column the following default features for live or playback from the selected camera s will give you the ability to Use navigation features for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras PTZ A user group will only be able to use this right if the user has access to one or more PTZ cameras Use n
169. ellow indicatori which lights up when a relevant event has taken place An optional sound on event notification can furthermore be configured in the Smart Client itself In the clients three differently colored indicators are available for each camera e The yellow D event indicator When event notification is used for a camera the yellow indicator will light up when a relevant event has occurred e A red Qmotion indicator lights up when motion has been detected e An optional green Cj video indicator lights up when video is received from the camera In the Smart Client all three indicators are in effect optional since the blue bar in which the indicators are displayed can be turned off in the Smart Client If Smart Client users in your organization are going to rely on event notification make sure they do not switch the blue bars off How to select required events 1 Inthe Available events list select the required event It is only possible to select one event at a time Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected event to the Selected Events list 3 Repeat for each required event www milestonesys com 109 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 If you later want to remove an event from the Selected Events list simply select
170. em link and follow the instructions for registering yourself as a user then log into the Software Registration Service Center by using your registered user name and password In the Software Registration Service Center click the Add SLC link Type your SLC Confirm that you want to add the SLC to your account and then click OK Once your SLC has been added click the Main menu link o En S p Click the Logout link to log out of the Software Registration Service Center Tip If you plan to use online activation when you activate your licenses make sure you use the same user name e mail address and password that you used when you registered the SLC www milestonesys com 36 Licenses Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Activate License Online Precondition Add at least one device see The Add Hardware Devices wizard on page 44 to your XProtect Professional system This starts the grace period of 30 days for the device in question You must activate a license for the device before the end of the grace period Activate a license On the Management Application s toolbar click File Activate License Online 1 Specify how many licenses you want for each device and then click OK 2 Next o Ifyou are an existing user enter your user name and password to log into the Software Registration Service Center o Ifyou are a new user click the Create new user link to set up a new user account in
171. em configuration on page 200 www milestonesys com 28 Install and upgrade Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 1 Create a folder called Backup on a network drive or on removable media 2 Onthe XProtect Professional server open My Computer and navigate to the XProtect Professional installation folder 3 Copythe following files and folders into your Backup folder o All configuration ini files o All scheduling sch files o The file users txt only present in a few installations o Folders with a name ending with ViewGroup and all their content Note that some of the files folders may not exist if upgrading from old software versions If you installed your XProtect Professional as a custom version to a non default file path make a backup of your existing configuration and restore it to a new installation folder called relevant folder Milestone Surveillance When you run the installer select Custom installation and when you are prompted for an installation folder select the relevant folder created for restoring Remove the current version You do not need to manually remove the old version of XProtect Professional before you install the new version The old version is removed when you install the new version Note however XProtect Basis versions earlier than 6 0 must be removed manually before installing the new version Video device drivers Video device drivers are installed automati
172. ending on what has been configured on the camera it will then know whether it is frames per second minute or hour If specified as for example MjpegLiveFrameRate1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device A value between 0 256 corresponds to using the Sensitivity slider when configuring motion detection settings in the Management Application If specified as for example MotionSensitivity1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Required MJPEG recording frame rate in number of frames depending on what has been configured on the camera it will then know whether it is frames per second minute or hour If you need to specify a value which includes a decimal separator use the full stop character example 7 62 If specified as for example MjpegRecordingFrameRate1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device 54 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 A value between 0 10000 corresponds to using the Motion slider when configuring motion detection settings in the Management Application If specified as for example MotionDetectionThreshold1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device MotionDetectionThreshold opt ional number Lets you specify how often motion dete
173. enne nnne nnmnnn nnmnnn anna nna nnn 77 About video and recording configuration cere 77 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 About database resizing eeeeeeeee esee eese siete enne nn ennemi nnnm eran nnnn erant nnnrs 78 About motion detection settings essere 78 About motion detection and PTZ cameras eee 79 Configure camera specific schedules leeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seen nnne nennt 79 Configure when cameras should do what sees 81 Configure motion detection eesseessseeeeseeeeee sees eene nennen nnn nn aan a nnne nnn nn nnn 82 Disable or delete cameras 4 eeeeeseeeeeee esee eee nnne nnn nan nn nnn inne nne sain nna innen 82 Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions eren 83 Recording and storage properties 4 eeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeens seen ennt nnne 84 Camera pDropertleg gege ds ctees EENS ccatce ct ance ENEE 100 PUD 121 About recording KE UE 121 Enc e 122 MICFOPNONCS esset 122 EVENTS REGER 124 About input and output eseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeee esee nennen nnne nennen nennt nnmnnn nnmnnn nennen 124 About events a
174. ent requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events in the neighboring columns Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields e Motion Detection amp Event Select this to speed up when motion is detected or when an event occurs and until another event occurs Remember to select start and stop events in the neighboring columns Select this to speed up according to the camera s speedup schedule see Speedup on page 156 only Select required start event The camera will begin using the speedup frame rates when the start event occurs Select required stop event The camera will return to the normal frame rates when the stop event occurs Click the Open button to configure detailed and or camera specific settings such as event notification PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas for the selected camera When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go Either in order to speed up things or because the properties in question are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to individual cameras All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Note that all of the Frame Rate MPEG properties can also be specified individually fo
175. ent A occurs until Event B occurs Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in yellow The two options can be combined overlap in time z but they cannot www milestonesys com 152 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 E mail SMS PTZ Patrolling Select All Clear All Set selected template value on selected cameras New schedule profile Scheduling options Administrator s Manual Select the required profile for the e mail notification schedule see E mail notification on page 156 for the camera s in question You specify a camera s e mail notification periods by creating schedule profiles based on periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in blue Select the required profile for the SMS notification schedule see SMS notification on page 156 for the camera s in question You specify a camera s SMS notification periods by creating schedule profiles based on periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in green ET Only available for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras with patrolling the continuous movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset positions Lets you select the required profile for the PTZ patrolling schedule see PTZ patrolling on page 156 for the camera s in question You specify a camera s patrolling schedule based on patrolling profiles within particular periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in
176. ent is displayed prominently in a specific position on the Matrix recipient while at the same time video from the older events is shifted to less prominent positions and eventually pushed out of the Matrix recipient in order to make space for the latest event s video With the Connect option you may experience that if video triggered by one event on a camera is already shown on the Matrix recipient videos triggered by another event on the same camera will not be displayed prominently as coming from the latest event simply because the Matrix recipient is already showing video from the camera in a less prominent position By selecting Disconnect then connect you can avoid this issue and ensure that video from the latest event is always displayed prominently Disconnects any existing connection Use if a particular event should cause video to stop being displayed in the Matrix recipient even if they are not yet old enough to be pushed out of the Matrix recipient If you selected Connect another red exclamation mark will indicate that there is still some configuration to be done Right clicking an action to select which camera to apply the action on In this example we have specified that when motion is detected on Camera b the selected Matrix recipient should connect to Camera b www milestonesys com 160 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Logs About logs Administrator s Manual X
177. ent settings for alarms properties Enabled Lets you enable the analytics event feature Specify the port used by this service Default port is 9090 Port Make sure that relevant VCA tool providers also use this port number If you change the port number make sure that VCA tool providers change their port number accordingly Specify whether events from all IP addresses host names are accepted or only events from IP addresses host names specified in a list see the following In the Address list specify a list of trusted IP addresses host names that you want this service to recognize The list is used to filter All network addresses or incoming data so that only events from certain IP addresses host Specified network addresses names are allowed Both Domain Name System DNS and IPv4 address formats can be used in the list You have two ways of adding addresses to the list either manually or by importing an external list of addresses Manual entering type the required IP address host name in the address list Repeat for each required address Click the Import button to browse for the required external list of addresses To import an external list the list must be saved in a txt Import file format and each IP address or host name must appear on a separate line in the file Windows simple text editor Microsoft Notepad is an excellent tool for creating such txt files Event Server settings Event Server settings let you conf
178. er devices including plug in defined sources VCA MIP etc see About alarms on page 192 the event should originate from in order to trigger the alarm Your options depend upon which type of event you have selected If you select Time profile you must select when the alarm should be enabled for triggering If you have not defined alarm time profiles see Add a time profile for Alarms on page 194 you will only be able to select Always If you have defined one or more time profiles they will be selectable from this list If you select Event based you must select which events should start and stop the alarm Events available for selection are hardware events defined on cameras video servers and input Also global manual event definitions see Add a manual event on page 128 can be used Note that when selecting Event based it is not possible to define alarms based on outputs only on inputs Select the time limit within which the operator must respond to the alarm Select the event to be triggered if the operator does not react withing the time limit specified in Time limit This could be for example sending an email SMS or similar 196 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Related cameras Related map Initial alarm owner Initial alarm priority Initial alarm category Event triggered by alarm Auto close alarm Administrator s Manual Select a maximum of 15 cameras for i
179. era supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode Select required unit for live and recording frame rates per second minute or hour Note that you can only select time bases that let you speed up frame rates Example If you have specified 15 frames per second in normal mode you cannot specify 16 frames per minute or hour in speedup mode 94 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Click the Open button to configure detailed and or camera specific Camera settings such as event notification PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas for the selected camera Speedup frame rate properties The speedup feature lets you use a higher than normal frame rate if motion is detected and or an event occurs When you enable See Spork Tp speedup further columns for specifying speedup details become available Speedup frame rate for viewing video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute Frame Rate or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode Required average frame rat
180. eral for all your cameras you cannot configure dynamic archiving paths for individual cameras When deciding which drives to use for dynamic archiving consider the pros and cons in the following examples in which we assume that the default archiving path see Configure default file paths on page 212 is on drive C drive letters are examples only different drive letters may of course be used in your organization e Camera records to drive C and archives to drive C If the path containing the camera s database is on one of the drives you have selected for dynamic archiving XProtect Professional will always try to archive to that drive first Archiving will take place quickly but may also fill up the drive with data fairly quickly e Camera records to drive C and archives to drive D Recordings and archives are on separate drives Archiving takes place less quickly XProtect Professional will first temporarily store the archive in the local default archiving directory on C www milestonesys com 145 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 then immediately move the archive to the archiving location on D Therefore sufficient space to accommodate the temporary archive is required on C e Camera 1 records to drive C and archives to drive D while Camera 2 records to drive D and archives to drive C Avoid this One camera s archiving may take up space required for another camera
181. erating systems can address 4 GB of virtual memory The operating system kernel reserves 2 GB for itself and each individual running process is allowed to address another 2 GB This is a default setting in Windows and for the vast majority of XProtect Professional installations it works fine As from XProtect Professional 6 5 the main components of the server the Recording Server service and the Image Server service have been compiled with the LARGEADDRESSAWARE flag This means you can optimize the memory usage of the XProtect Professional Recording Server and Image Server services by configuring your 32 bit Windows operating system so that it restricts the kernel to 1GB of memory leaving 3GB of address space for processes compiled with the LARGEADDRESSAWARE flag This should improve the stability of especially the Recording Server service by allowing it to exceed the previous 2 GB virtual memory limit making it possible for it to use up to 3 GB of memory The change in Windows configuration is known as 3 GB switching www milestonesys com 208 Common tasks Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 When is 3 GB switching relevant For very large XProtect Professional installations and or for installations with many megapixel cameras it can be relevant to change Windows settings so that only 1 GB of virtual memory is reserved for the operating system kernel leaving 3 GB for running processes If you use the Window
182. ere all servers cameras etc can communicate without the need for a router See Add Hardware Devices wizard Express see Express on page 45 Scans your network for relevant hardware devices based on your specifications regarding required IP ranges discovery methods drivers and device user names and passwords See Add Hardware Devices wizard Advanced see Advanced on page 47 Specify details about each hardware device separately A good choice if you only want to add a few hardware devices and you know their IP addresses required user names and passwords etc See Add Hardware Devices wizard Manual see Manual on page 49 Import data about cameras as comma separated values from a file An effective method if you are setting up several systems See Add Hardware Devices Wizard Import from CSV File see Import from CSV file on page 51 44 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Express The Express option scans your network for relevant hardware devices and helps you quickly add them to your system With the Express option the wizard only scans for hardware devices supporting device discovery and only on the part of your network subnet where the XProtect Professional server itself is located To use the Express method your XProtect Professional server and your cameras must be on the same layer 2 network that is a network where all servers cameras etc can commun
183. eriods of time remember to select Start event and Stop event from the lists below the calendar section o Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields o To delete an unwanted part of a schedule profile right click it and select Delete o To quickly fill or clear an entire day double click the name of the day o As an alternative to dragging inside the calendar section use the Start time End time and Day fields then the Change Period or Set Period button as required When using the Start time and End time fields remember that time is specified in increments of five minutes You cannot specify a period shorter than five minutes and you can only use times like 12 00 12 05 12 10 12 15 etc If you specify a time outside of the five minute intervals such as 12 13 you will get an error message www milestonesys com 151 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 General scheduling properties Properties in this window Scheduling all cameras essent 152 Schedulirig OptlOns 5 cite ecc Ene etuer ote oru aaa BR eoa e DDR naecuens 153 Lo teil le BET 154 Scheduling all cameras When you configure general scheduling and archiving see Configure general scheduling and archiving on page 149 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go Either in order t
184. ersions earlier than 4 0a the XProtect Professional is installed in C Program FilesMMilestoneMMilestone XProtect Professional and plug ins for add on products are installed in C Program Files Milestone Milestone XProtect Professional plugin By default in XProtect Professional version 4 0a and later the XProtect Professional is installed in www milestonesys com 14 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 C Program Files Milestone XProtect Professional and plug ins for add on products are installed in C Program Files Milestone XProtect Professional plugin The change to the default installation path means that if you have plug ins for add on products for XProtect Professional versions earlier than 4 0a these plug ins will not work with your new XProtect Professional because your new XProtect Professional will look for plug ins at a different location If you want your new XProtect Professional to work with older plug ins for add on products the solution is therefore either to copy the existing plug ins from the old default installation path for plug ins to the new default installation path for plug ins Or to change the XProtect Professional installation path to the old default C Program Files Milestone Milestone XProtect Professional during the installation of your new XProtect Professional Install silently 1 Locate the Smart Client installation program exe file
185. erver software on page 26 Step 4 Restoring alarms data in SQL Server Express database Luckily most users never need to restore their backed up alarm data but if you ever need to do the following 1 In the Windows Start menu open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express Tip If you do not have SQL Server Management Studio Express it can be downloaded for free from www microsoft com downloads see http www microsoft com downloads http www microsoft com downloads Connect to a server Specify the name of the required SQL Server and connect using the user account the database was created with Tip You do not have to type the name of the SQL server If you click inside the Server name field and select Browse for more gt you can select the required SQL Server from a list instead In the Object Explorer on the left expand SQL Server Databases right click the VIDEOOSDB database and then select Tasks gt Restore gt Database VIDEOOSDB is the default name of the database containing the system configuration If you can find the database but it is not called VIDEOOSDB it could be because you gave the database another name during installation In the following we will assume that the database uses the default name In the Restore Database dialog on the General page under Source for restore select From device and click Browse for more to the right of the field In the Specify Backup dialog
186. es en US 2 Runasilent installation using one of the following two options a Run with default parameter settings To run a silent installation using the default values for all parameters start a command prompt cmd exe in the directory where the installation program is located and execute following command For XProtect Smart Client installation MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe quiet For XProtect Professional installation MilestoneXProtectXProtect Professionallnstaller exe quiet This will perform a quiet installation of the XProtect Smart Client XProtect Professional using default values for parameters such as target directory etc To change the default settings please see next topic b Customize default parameters using an xml argument file as input In order to customize the default installation settings an xml file with modified values must be provided as input In order to generate the xml file with default values open a command prompt in the directory where the installation program is located and execute following command For XProtect Smart Client gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe generateargsfile args xml For XProtect Professional gt MilestoneXProtectXProtect Professionallnstaller exe generateargsfile args xml Open the generated args xml file using for example Notepad exe and perform any changes needed Then in order to run silent installation using these modified values execute following c
187. esponding to 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds However if specifying a very long pre recording time you can potentially run into a scenario where your pre recording time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving see About archiving on page 143 times That can be problematic since pre recording does not work well during archiving Seconds of pre recording You can store recordings from periods following detected motion Post recording and or stop events Select check box to enable this feature Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring column Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video from after recording stop conditions that is motion or stop event are met Usually only some seconds of post recording is required but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of post recording Seconds of post recording corresponding to 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds However if specifying a very long post recording time you can potentially run into a scenario where your post recording time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving times That can be problematic since post recording does not work well during archiving Click the Open button to configure detailed and or camera specific Camera settings such as event notification PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas for the selected camera Select All Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Clear All Click button to clear all
188. essional 8 1 Password required to access the administrator account A few hardware devices do not require user name password for access if such hardware devices are used in your organization you can leave the field blank Tip If you are in doubt about which user name password to use Password ask yourself Have previously used a web page to connect to the hardware device and view video While did this was also able to configure camera settings such as resolution etc If you can answer yes to both questions you were probably using the hardware device s administrator account in which case you will also know the user name password If still in doubt look in the XProtect Device Pack release notes Click to add user a name password combination When ready click Next Detected and verified hardware devices The wizard automatically scans your network for hardware devices and lists devices real time as they are detected All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Wait until the scan is complete If the scan takes very long you can stop it with the Stop Scan button the wizard will remember any devices detected up to that point When the scan is complete 1 Go through the list of detected hardware devices to see if it contains unwanted devices If it does clear the check box in the Use column for each unwanted device 2 lf any hardware devices are missing
189. et position this way and the preset position is to be used in PTZ patrolling or PTZ on event you must manually configure PTZ patrolling and or PTZ on event to use the preset position again Lets you try out a preset position In the list select the preset Test position you want to test then click the button to view the camera move to the selected position Lets you move a preset position selected in the list up and down respectively The selected preset position is moved one step per PTZ control wheel click By moving preset positions up or down you can control the sequence in which preset positions are presented in clients PTZ patrolling PTZ related properties are only available when you are dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera PTZ patrolling is the continuous movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset positions see PTZ preset positions on page 115 To use patrolling you should normally have specified at least two preset positions for the PTZ camera in question To configure PTZ patrolling you basically select a patrolling profile in the Patrolling profiles list then specify required properties to define the exact behavior of the patrolling profile Tip Although it is technically not patrolling specifying a patrolling profile with only one preset position is possible A patrolling profile with only one preset position can when combined with scheduling be useful in two cases For moving a PTZ camera to a speci
190. fic position at a specific time and for moving a PTZ camera to a specific position upon manual control of the PTZ camera Restart services see Start and stop services on page 184 after having made changes to PTZ settings When you have defined your patrolling profiles also remember to schedule see PTZ patrolling on page 156 the use of patrolling profiles Bear in mind that patrolling can be overridden if users with the required rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 manually operate PTZ cameras Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time Therefore we recommended stopping see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when configuring such devices for motion detection and PTZ See also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 www milestonesys com 117 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Patrolling profiles A PTZ camera may patrol according to several different patrolling profiles For example a PTZ camera in a supermarket may patrol according to one patrolling profile during opening hours and according to another patrolling profile when the supermarket is closed The Patrolling profiles list lets you select which patrolling profile to configure e Add New Lets you add a new patrolling profile to the l
191. figuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e External events integrated for example MIP plug in events Overview of events and output Types of events Analytics events can be used as alarms and integrated seamlessly with the Alarms feature see About alarms on page 192 3 Analytics events see Overview of events and output on page Analytics events 125 are typically data received from external third party video content analysis VCA see VCA on page 222 providers An example of a VCA based system could be an access control system Hardware input such as door sensors can be attached to input ports on hardware devices Input from such external hardware input units can be used for generating events in XProtect Professional Events based on input from hardware input units attached to hardware devices are called hardware input events Some hardware devices have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc configured in the hardware devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the hardware device s IP address When this is the case XProtect Professional considers such detections as input from the hardware and you can use such detections as input events as well Hardware input events Lastly hardware input events can be based on XProtect Professional detecting motion in video from a camera b
192. first level of the tree structure simply indicates that you are working with a XProtect Professional system e The second level indicates that this is the default setup e The third level refers to the languages in which the welcome page is available In the example the welcome page is available in a dozen languages English Arabic Danish Dutch French and more e The fourth level refers to the features which are or can be made available to users For example these features could be limited to the Smart Client e The fifth level 5 refers to particular versions of each feature for example version 4 0 32 bit etc which are or can be made available to users e The sixth level 6 refers to the language versions of the features which are or can be made available to users For the Smart Client which is only available with all languages embedded the only option is All Languages The fact that only standard features are initially available helps reduce installation time and save space on the server There is simply no need to have a feature or language version available on the server if nobody is going to use it You can however easily make more features and or languages available as required See Making new features available in the following for more information Making new features available Making new features plug ins or special language versions available to your organization s users involves two steps
193. first line of the CSV file must contain the headers and subsequent lines must contain information about one hardware device each e Separators can be commas semicolons or tabs but cannot be mixed e Alllines must contain valid values pay special attention to the fact that camera names user names etc must be unique and must not contain any of the following special characters lt gt amp V7 1 e There is no fixed order of values and optional parameters can be omitted entirely e Boolean fields are considered true unless set to 0 false or no e Lines containing only separators are ignored e Empty lines are ignored Even though the CSV file format is generally ASCII only Unicode identifiers are allowed even without Unicode identifiers the entire file or even individual characters are allowed to be Unicode strings www milestonesys com 55 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 If you need to include separator characters in a value for example if a camera name is Reception Camera 1 you can encapsulate the value in quotes to indicate that the separator should not be interpreted as separating values in the file Such quote encapsulated values are interpreted as they appear If a separator a quote or a space is needed in a value the whole value has to be encapsulated in quotes Leading and trailing spaces outside the quote encapsulated value are removed while spaces inside the quote enca
194. free a license When you replace a camera you must use the Management Application Replace Hardware Device wizard see About the Replace Hardware Device wizard on page 71 to map all relevant databases of cameras microphones inputs outputs etc Remember to activate the license once you are finished www milestonesys com 34 Licenses Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Overview of license information on page 35 About getting additional licenses If you want to add or have already added more device channels than you currently have licenses for you must buy additional licenses before the cameras can send data to your XProtect Professional System To get additional licenses for XProtect Professional contact your vendor or visit www milestonesys com to log into the software registration service center When your license file lic is updated you can activate your licenses See Manage licenses for more information on activating Overview of license information You get an excellent overview of your XProtect Professional licenses from the Management Application s navigation pane Expand Advanced Configuration and select Hardware Devices This presents you with the Hardware Device Summary table Hardware devices typically cameras but could also be dedicated Hardware Device Name input output boxes Licensing status of your hardware devices License Can be either Licensed number of day s gra
195. ft to control the motion setting The more you drag the slider to the left the more positive motion detections you see because less change will be needed to trigger a positive motion detection The number of positive motion detections may also affect the amount of video you record the amount of notifications you receive etc If you want motion detection to take place only on keyframes of the Keyframe Only video stream to reduce the system resources used on motion detection select Keyframe only Specify how often motion detection analysis is carried out on video from the camera The default is every 240 milliseconds close to Tos once a quarter of a second The interval is applied regardless of Detection interval your cameras frame rate settings Adjusting this setting can help lower the amount of system resources used on motion detection Specify whether the full image or a selected percentage of the image should be analyzed For example by specifying 25 every fourth pixel is analyzed instead of all pixels reducing the system resources used but also offering less accurate motion detection Detection resolution Configure User Access wizard The Configure User Access wizard helps you quickly configure clients access to the XProtect Professional server as well as which users should be able to use clients The access summary at the end of the wizard lists the cameras your users have access to When you use the wizard all users
196. fter 15 seconds Input may also be received in the form of TCP or UDP data packages which can be analyzed by XProtect Professional and if they match specified criteria used to generate events Such events are called generic events Generic events Hardware output can be activated automatically when events occur For example when a door is opened hardware input event lights are switched on hardware output Output control on event When configuring the output control you can select between all output and events defined in XProtect Professional You are not limited to selecting output or events defined on particular hardware devices You can use a single event for activating more than one output Before you configure events of any type configure general event handling such as which ports XProtect Professional should use for event data Normally you can just use the default values but it is a good idea to verify that your organization is not already using the ports for other purposes See Configure general event handling on page 130 Before you specify use of hardware input and hardware output units on a hardware device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the hardware device Most hardware devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the XProtect Professional release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the hardw
197. fter the last motion is detected the camera will return to recording keyframes only Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record keyframes only Select this check box to record all frames when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of this feature requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events in the neighboring lists Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields Use when recording on Event or Motion Detection amp Event Select required start event The camera will begin recording all frames when the start event occurs Select required stop event The camera will again only recording keyframes when the stop event occurs This feature is only available on cameras supporting dual stream Enable dedicated live stream Stream Resolution FPS Manual recording This additional stream feature lets you use the alternative stream of the camera It enables two independent streams to the recording server a stream for live viewing and another stream for recording purposes with different resolution encoding and frame rate Select the type of the live stream Stream settings for viewing live video and for recording video may very well be different in order to get the best result Select the resolution of the camera Select the camera s live frame rate per second FPS Whe
198. fy the number of seconds required for the PTZ camera to move from one preset position to another Default is five seconds During this transition time motion detection is automatically disabled as irrelevant motion is otherwise likely to be detected while the camera moves between the preset positions After the specified number of seconds motion detection is automatically enabled again Transition time sec The transition time applies to all presets in the patrolling profile It is thus important that the camera is able to reach between any of the patrolling profile s preset positions within the number of seconds you specify If not false motion is likely to be detected Bear in mind that it takes longer for the PTZ camera to move between positions that are located physically far apart for example from an extreme left position to an extreme right position than between positions that are located physically close together Tip Note that wait time and transition time settings are tied to the selected patrolling profile This allows you the flexibility of having different wait time and transition time settings for different patrolling profiles on the same camera PTZ scanning PTZ scanning continuous panning is supported on a few PTZ cameras only e PTZ scanning Only available if your camera supports PTZ scanning Lets you enable PTZ scanning and select a PTZ scanning speed from the list below the check box Note that PTZ scanning only
199. g up several similar systems First select whether cameras and the XProtect Professional server is online that is having working network connections or offline Then point to the CSV file and click Next Add Hardware Devices wizard Import from CSV File example of CSV file The following is an example of a CSV file for use when cameras and server are online It includes the mandatory parameters HardwareAddress and HardwarePort as well as the optional parameters HardwarePassword and CameraName Note that some of the hardware devices in the example have more than one camera attached In the example we therefore use four versions of the CameraName parameter CameraName 1 CameraName2 etc Had all the hardware devices only had one camera attached each we would only have needed CameraNamet1 See Add Hardware Devices Wizard Import from CSV File see Import from CSV file on page 51 for detailed descriptions of all mandatory and optional parameters HardwareAddress HardwarePort HardwarePassword CameraNamel CameraName2 CameraName3 CameraName4 192 168 200 220 80 TOP53cr3T Reception 192 168 200 221 80 tOpSeCrEt Staircase A Fire Exit Staircase B Lobby 192 168 200 222 80 TOP53CR3T Car Park East 192 168 200 223 80 topZKRID Car Park West 192 168 200 224 80 TopsEcreT Street Exit Street Entrance Station Exit Station Entrance 192 168 200 225 80 tercespot Production Level 2
200. ge 165 periods Before you can define this type of schedule e mail notification must be enabled see E mail properties on page 166 Select the required profile for the e mail notification schedule see E mail notification on page 156 for the camera s in question E mail You specify a camera s e mail notification periods by creating schedule profiles based on periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in blue SMS notification When you configure scheduling see Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 for specific cameras you can specify SMS notification see Configure SMS notifications on page 168 periods Before you can define this type of schedule SMS notification must be enabled see SMS properties on page 168 Select the required profile for the SMS notification schedule see SMS notification on page 156 for the camera s in question You SMS specify a camera s SMS notification periods by creating schedule profiles based on periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in green PTZ patrolling When you configure scheduling see Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras capable of patrolling see PTZ patrolling on page 117 you can specify www milestonesys com 156 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 which patrolling profiles to use at specific times Before you can
201. ges from the selected camera This feature is available in XProtect Smart Client only Listen to recorded audio from microphones related to the selected camera s You cannot select a feature if the selected camera does not support the relevant feature For example PTZ related rights are only available if the relevant camera is a PTZ camera Some features depend on the user s group s General Access on page 180 properties Square filled check boxes can appear in the lower part of the window if you have selected several cameras and a feature applies for some but not all of the cameras Example For camera A you have selected that use of the Events is allowed for camera B you have not allowed this If you select both camera A and camera B in the list the Events check box in the lower part of the window will be square filled Another example Camera C is a PTZ camera for which you have allowed the PTZ preset positions feature whereas camera D is not a PTZ camera If you select both camera C and camera D in the list the PTZ preset positions check box will be square filled Alarm Access Properties When you add or edit basic users see Add basic users on page 177 Windows users see Add Windows users on page 177 or groups see Add user groups on page 178 specify their Smart Client alarm access rights www milestonesys com 182 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 View Services About servi
202. he old location you will be asked whether you want to move the archived recordings to the new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Note that if you move archived recordings XProtect Professional will also archive what is currently in the camera database In case you wonder why the camera database is empty just after you have moved archived recordings this is the reason Click button to delete all archived recordings for the camera Recordings in the camera s regular database will not be affected The ability to delete is available regardless of whether you use a single archiving path or dynamic archiving paths MPORTANT Use with caution All archived recordings for the camera will be permanently deleted As a security measure you will be asked to confirm the deletion Delete Archives www milestonesys com 107 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Retention Time Database Repair Action Configure Dynamic Paths www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings from the camera that is recordings in the camera s database as well as any archived recordings Default is 30 days Note that the retention time covers the total amount of time you want to keep recordings for In earlier XProtect Professional versions time limits were specified separately for the database and archives Select which action to take if
203. he selected point in time This can help you select the best possible restore point 3 Click the Load Restore Point button 4 f you are sure that you want to overwrite the current configuration with the one from the selected restore point click OK 5 Only relevant if the current configuration contains cameras or other devices which were not present in the selected restore point You will be asked whether you want to delete or keep recordings from affected devices If keeping the recordings note that they will not be accessible until you add the affected devices to XProtect Professional again Select the required option and click OK 6 Click OK in the Restore Points dialog 7 Inthe Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration and select Services 8 Forthe Recording Server and Image Server services respectively click the Restart button When the two services are restarted the configuration from the selected restore point is applied www milestonesys com 207 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Common tasks About handling daylight saving time Daylight saving time DST also known as summer time is the practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more daylight and mornings to have less Typically clocks are moved forward one hour during the spring season and adjusted backward during the fall season Note that use of D
204. he so called transition time specified as part of the PTZ camera s PTZ patrolling properties see PTZ patrolling on page 117 motion detection is automatically enabled again Configure camera specific schedules If you base your schedule profile or parts of it on events within periods of time remember to select Start event and Stop event from the lists below the calendar section www milestonesys com 79 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields The fact that a camera transfers video to XProtect Professional does not necessarily mean that video from the camera is recorded Recording is configured separately see Configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 For each camera you can create schedule profiles based on Online periods e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in pink e Events within periods of time example from Event A occurs until Event B occurs Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in yellow The two options can be combined zz but they cannot overlap in time Speedup e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in olive green E mail notification e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in blue SE
205. he string In other words XProtect Professional will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday e Lets you add an end parenthesis character to the Event message expression field e AND Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message expression field With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example If using User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve Event message expression e OR Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message expression field With an OR operator you specify that either one or Aber term must be Mlanaed eanfiguration using User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Event priority Event protocol Event rule type Send e mail if this even
206. hem later www milestonesys com 71 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Password required to access the administrator account A few hardware devices do not require user name password for access if such hardware devices are used in your organization you can leave the field blank Tip If you are in doubt about which user name password to use Password ask yourself Have previously used a web page to connect to the hardware device and view video While did this was also able to configure camera settings such as resolution etc If you can answer yes to both questions you were probably using the hardware device s administrator account in which case you will also know the user name password If still in doubt look in the XProtect Device Pack release notes To specify which device driver to use for the new hardware device you can e Select the video device driver in the Hardware device type list and then click Auto detect Verify Hardware Device Type to verify that the driver matches the hardware device O e Click Auto detect Verify Hardware Device Type to automatically detect and verify the right driver When the right driver is found the Serial number MAC address field will display the MAC address of the new hardware device When done click Next Camera and database action The last page of the Replace Hardware wizard lets you decide what to do with the
207. her computer you want to use for this purpose To access the XProtect Web Client 1 Setup the XProtect Mobile server in the Management Application 2 Openan Internet browser Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox Google Chrome Opera or Safari or click Open XProtect Web Client in the Mobile Server Manager see About Mobile Server Manager on page 190 3 Typein the IP address and port of the server on which the XProtect Mobile server is running Example The XProtect Mobile server is installed on a server with the IP address 127 2 3 4 and is configured to accept HTTP connections on port 8081 and HTTPS connections on port 8082 these port settings are the default settings of the installer In the address bar of your browser type hitip 127 2 3 4 8081 XProtectMobile Web or https 127 2 3 4 8082 XProtectMobile W eb depending on whether you want to use a standard HTTP connection or a secure HTTPS connection You can now begin using the XProtect Web Client 4 Add the address as a favorite in your browser for easy future access to the XProtect Web Client If you use the XProtect Web Client on the local computer on which you installed the XProtect Mobile server you can also use the desktop shortcut created by the installer When you click the shortcut this launches your default browser and opens the XProtect Web Client Clear your Internet browser s cache upon upgrade Note that Internet browsers running the XProtect Web Client must ha
208. his window Online period A 155 ferreo E 156 Gs Rue et re coasts reticere arenan anean eeen aeaea 156 SMS notiflcaton ener 156 za Fico uro es 156 Online period When you configure scheduling see Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 for specific cameras your Online Period settings are probably the most important since they determine when each camera should transfer video to XProtect Professional By default cameras added to XProtect Professional will automatically be online and you will only need to modify the online period settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events Note however that this default may be changed as part of the general scheduling options see Scheduling options on page 153 in which case subsequently added cameras will not automatically be online The fact that a camera transfers video to XProtect Professional does not necessarily mean that video from the camera is recorded Recording is configured separately see Configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 Select the required profile for example Always on for the online schedule see Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 for the camera s in question You specify a camera s online periods by creating schedule profiles based on e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 Online shown in pink e Events within periods of time example
209. icate without the need for a router The reason for this is that device discovery relies on direct communication between the XProtect Professional server and the cameras If you know that routers are used on your network use the advanced on page 47 or manual on page 49 method instead When using the Express option the wizard is divided into these pages e Hardware detection and verification on page 45 e Overview and names on page 46 What is device discovery Device discovery is a method with which hardware devices make information about themselves available on the network Based on such information XProtect Professional can quickly recognize relevant hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders and include them in the scan Hardware detection and verification The wizard automatically scans your network for hardware devices and lists devices real time as they are detected All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Wait until the scan is complete If the scan takes very long you can stop it with the Stop Scan button The wizard will remember any devices detected up to that point When the scan is complete 1 Gothrough the list of detected hardware devices to see if it contains unwanted devices If it does clear the check box in the Use column for each unwanted device 2 lf any hardware devices are missing from the list verify that the missing hardware
210. ication and then use Telnet to send a small amount of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification For this example we have created a generic event called Video Our generic event specifies that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package the generic event should be triggered Your generic event may be different but you can still use the principles outlined in the following 1 In the Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configurations then expand Cameras and Storage Information right click a camera to which you have access in the Smart Client and select Properties Select Event Notification and select the required generic event XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required Make sure that your generic event is the only event appearing in the Selected Events list while you are performing the test otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event which triggers the event notification Once you are done testing you can move any temporarily removed events back to the Selected Events list Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button in the Manageme
211. ich the use of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras is possible Connected cameras have Pan tilt Zoom capabilities www milestonesys com Select check box if any of the cameras attached to the video encoder device is a PTZ camera 76 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM port a k a serial port in question select the required option Options are device specific depending on which PTZ protocols are used by the device in question If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM port in question select None Dp Some of the options concern absolute and relative positioning What is that Absolute positioning is when the PTZ camera is controlled based on a single fixed position against which all other positions are measured Relative positioning is when the PTZ camera is controlled relative to its current position The table in the lower half of the dialog contains a row for each video channel on the hardware device First row from the top corresponds to video channel 1 second row from the top corresponds to video channel 2 etc Name Name of the camera attached to the video channel in question Select whether the camera on the selected camera channel is fixed or moveable Type e Fixed Camera is a regular camera mounted in a fixed position e Moveable Camera is a PTZ camera Available only if Moveable is selected in the Type column Sele
212. igger your generic event In our case a single term video is required While you type in the Telnet window you may experience so called echo This is the server repeating some or all of the characters it receives It will not have any impact as long as you are sure you type the required characters 7 Close the Telnet windowL L It is important that you close the window since your input is not sent to the surveillance system until you close the window 8 Goto your Smart Client If the yellow event indicator lights up for the required camera your generic event works as intended What is Telnet Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet www milestonesys com 132 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 General event properties Ports and polling The General Event Properties window lets you specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling Specify port number to use for handling events including generic ENEE events Default port is port 1234 Specify port number to use for sending event information from SMTP event port hardware devices to XProtect Professional via SMTP Default port is port 25 Port to use for FTP communicat
213. igure general settings for alarms and specify the following www milestonesys com 42 Application settings Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Keep closed alarms for Keep all other alarms for Keep logs for Log server communication www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Specify the number of days for which to keep closed alarms i e alarms in the states Closed Ignore and Reject This is normally set to a low number such as 3 days but you can define any number up to 99999 days server space permitting The value 0 can be used to indicate keep closed alarms indefinitely server space permitting Specify the number of days for which to keep all other alarms i e alarms not in the states Closed Ignore and Reject This is normally set to a somewhat higher number such as 30 days but you can define any number up to 99999 days server space permitting The value 0 can be used to indicate keep all other alarms indefinitely server space permitting IMPORTANT Alarms often have associated video recordings While the alarm information itself is stored on the event server the associated video recordings are fetched from the relevant surveillance system server when users wish to view them Therefore if it is vital to have access to video recordings from all your alarms make sure that video recordings from relevant cameras are stored on relevant surveillance system servers for at least as long as you intend to keep ala
214. igure similar properties quickly For example if you have 20 cameras and you want a particular frame rate on all of them you can simply enter it once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then Apply Template use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button Select All Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Clear All Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Apply template on selected cameras Lets you apply the value from the template to selected cameras Live and recording settings MPEG cameras This wizard page only appears if one or more of your cameras use the MPEG video format Specify which frame rate to use for each camera and whether to record all frames or keyframes only You can also select pre and post recording allowing you to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion and or specified events Note that all of the properties can also be specified individually for each camera www milestonesys com 60 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Required average frame rate for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour Live Frame Rate If the camera supports dual stream and dual
215. il notifications to one or more recipients when Motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected Events occur You can select individually for each event whether you want to receive an e mail notification or not Archiving see About archiving on page 143 fails if e mail notification has been selected as part of the archiving properties Configure e mail notifications Do the following 1 In the Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click E mail and select Properties Specify required properties see E mail properties on page 166 including the important information about which SMTP mail server to use XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for www milestonesys com 165 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Administrator s Manual each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required Tip You can test your e mail notification configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test e mail to the specified recipients 3 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar When you configure e mail alerts also
216. iles across the internet HTTP is the standard used for formatting and transmission of data on the World Wide Web UO Input Output refers to the communication between a computer and a person Inputs are the signals or data received by the system and outputs are the signals or data sent from it I frame Short name for intra frame used in the MPEG standard for digital video compression An l frame is a single frame stored at specified intervals The I frame records the entire view of the camera whereas the frames that follow P frames record only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files An Lirame is similar to a keyframe Image Server A service that handles access to XProtect Professional for remote users logging in with Smart Client The Image Server service does not require separate hardware it runs in the background on the XProtect Professional server The Image Server service is not 217 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 configured separately as it is configured through XProtect Professional s Management Application IP Internet Protocol protocol or standard specifying the format and addressing scheme used for sending data packets across networks IP is often combined with another protocol TCP The combination known as TCP IP allows data packets to be sent back and forth between two points on a network for longer periods of time and is used when co
217. ined events if manually defined events see Add a manual event on page 128 are available in your XProtect Professional system these can determine if the user can trigger selected manually defined events in the Smart Client See Configure User Access wizard on page 68 External plug ins if any external plug ins are set up in your system these might control user s rights to handle alarms General access rights can determine whether the user is allowed to only view or also to manage alarms See Configure User Access wizard on page 68 Time profiles for alarms Alarms can also be based on time profiles for alarms see Add a time profile for Alarms on page 194 Alarm s time profiles are periods of time used when creating alarm definitions You can for example create a time profile for alarms covering the period from 2 30 PM till 3 30 PM on Mondays and then use the time profile to make sure that certain alarm definitions are only enabled within this period Frequently asked questions XProtect Central and alarms Does Alarms cover the same functionality as XProtect Central Yes to a large extent since configuration of former XProtect Central functionality is now included in the Alarms feature XProtect Central was an independent product consisting of two parts a dedicated server and a number of dedicated clients Alarms on the other hand is an integrated part of XProtect Professional This www milestonesys com 193 Advanced
218. ings Alarm data settings When you configure alarm data settings specify the following Alarm Data Levels tab Priorities Level Name Sound www milestonesys com Add new priorities with level numbers of your choosing or use edit the default priority levels numbers 1 2 or 3 These priority levels are used to configure the Initial alarm priority setting see Alarms definition on page 195 Type a name for the entity You can create as many as you like Select the sound to be associated with the alarm Use one if the default sounds or add more in Sound Settings on page 198 197 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Alarm Data Levels tab States In addition to the default state levels numbers 1 4 9 and 11 which can not be edited or reused add new states with level numbers of Level your choosing These state levels are only visible in the Smart Client s Alarm List Name Type a name for the entity You can create as many as you like Alarm Data Levels tab Categories Add new categories with level numbers of your choosing These Level category levels are used to configure the Initial alarm category setting see Alarms definition on page 195 Name Type a name for the entity You can create as many as you like Alarm List Configuration tab In Available columns use gt to select which columns should be available in the Smart Client s Alarm List Use
219. ion configuration When using SMS notifications also bear in mind individual cameras scheduling see SMS notification on page 156 Delete a selected event Add a new event When the Generic Events node is selected clicking Add will add a new generic event When a specific generic event is selected clicking Add will add a timer event on page 129 to the selected generic event Output control on event Events and Output specific properties When you add output controls on events see Configure hardware output on event on page 130 specify the following properties Event Output Select the required event Select the required output event Scheduling and archiving About scheduling The scheduling feature lets you specify e When you want to archive see About archiving on page 143 e That some cameras transfer video to XProtect Professional at all times e That some cameras transfer video only within specific periods of time or when specific events occur e When you want to receive notifications from the system You can set up general scheduling properties for all your cameras or individual properties per camera You can set up when e One or more cameras should be online that is transfer video to XProtect Professional www milestonesys com 142 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e One of more cameras should use speedup that is use a higher than
220. ion detection in most areas of the preview in which case you can clear the few sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection With the Exclude All button you can quickly deselect them all www milestonesys com 66 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Motion Detection Motion detection is a key element in most surveillance systems Depending on your configuration motion detection settings may determine when video is recorded saved on the surveillance system server when notifications are sent when output a light or siren is triggered etc It is important to find the best possible motion detection settings for each camera to avoid unnecessary recordings notifications etc Depending on the physical location of your cameras it is a good idea to test settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams will not be able to connect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time therefore it is recommended to stop see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when you configure such devices for motion detection and PTZ See also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 You can configure motion detection settings for each camera or for several cameras at once Use the list in the left pane of the wizard window to select c
221. ion with the hardware device FTP event port Default port is port 21 For a small number of hardware devices primarily dedicated input output devices see About dedicated input output devices on page 73 itis necessary for XProtect Professional to regularly check the state of the hardware devices input ports in order to detect input Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling You can specify in tenths of a second the interval between state checks Default value is 10 tenths of a second that is one second For dedicated input output devices it is highly recommended that the polling frequency is set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which hardware devices require polling see the release note Polling interval 1 10 second Events and output properties Properties in this window Analytics Cven esere 133 Hardware input event nennen nnne 135 Hardware OWP secan a ES 137 MEREATUR 137 MULA 138 Generic event eid eda dede dt n Ode deste Re les 138 Output control on event Events and Output specific properties 142 Analytics event When you configure analytics events see Add an analytics event on page 127 specify the following www milestonesys com 133 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Name Description Test Event Administrator s Manual Type a name for the even
222. is committed to protecting the security of the information collected from XProtect Professional installations Milestone has implemented security measures to help protect against the loss and misuse of data being collected The information is stored in a secure server environment that uses firewall and other advanced technologies to prevent interference or unauthorized access from outside intruders Disable information collection 1 In the Management Application toolbar click Help Privacy Options 2 Onthe Privacy Options tab clear the Yes would like to improve Milestone XProtect Professional information collection check box 3 Click OK Changerrestore Management Application behavior You can change the way the Management Application behaves For example by default the Management Application asks you to confirm many of your actions If you feel this is not necessary you can change the behavior of the Management Application so it will not ask you again 1 In the Management Application s menu bar select Application Settings Application Behavior 2 Foreach action you can now select how the Management Application should behave Examples o When you attempt to delete a hardware device should the Management Application ask you to confirm that you want to delete the hardware device or should it delete the hardware device straight away without asking o You can use a maximum of 64 cameras at a time on a single XProtect
223. is way you can specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time or whether they should start and stop transferring video when specific events occur within specific periods of time The template can help you configure similar properties quickly For example if you have 20 cameras and you want a particular frame rate on all of them you can simply enter it once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras www milestonesys com 57 Wizards Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Apply Template Select All Clear All Apply template on selected cameras Administrator s Manual Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Lets you apply the value from the template to selected cameras Live and recording settings Motion JPEG cameras This wizard page only appears if one or more of your cameras use the MJPEG video format Specify which frame rates to use for each camera You can also select pre and post recording allowing you to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion and or specified events All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue backgro
224. ist When you add a new patrolling profile you can either give it a unique name or reuse an existing name from another PTZ camera with PTZ patrolling Using several identically named patrolling profiles can be advantageous when you later configure scheduling Example If you have configured patrolling profiles identically named Night Patrolling on 25 different cameras you can schedule the use of Night Patrolling on all 25 cameras in one go even though Night Patrolling covers individual preset positions on each of the 25 cameras e Delete Lets you delete an existing patrolling profile Note that the selected patrolling profile will be removed from the list without further warning There are already some patrolling profiles listed why Names of patrolling profile defined for other cameras can be reused This allows you to use a single patrolling profile name across several PTZ cameras and this can make scheduling see PTZ patrolling on page 156 of PTZ patrolling much easier Despite the fact that several PTZ cameras share a patrolling profile name the movement between preset positions is of course individual for each camera Preset positions to use in a patrolling profile Having selected a patrolling profile in the Patrolling profiles list you can specify which of the PTZ camera s preset positions should be used for the selected patrolling scheme 1 Inthe Preset Positions list select the preset positions you want to use A preset posi
225. ives 00408c51e181_ 2 2012 12 31 23 15 Before configuring archiving see About archiving on page 148 locations consider whether you want to use static or dynamic archiving paths e Static archiving paths mean that for a particular camera archiving will take place to a particular location and to that location only Static archiving paths are in principle individual for each camera but they do not have to be unique several cameras can easily use the same path if required You can configure static archiving paths for individual cameras or as part of the general Recording and archiving paths properties o Individual cameras In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Cameras and Storage Information double click the required camera select Recording amp Archiving Paths and specify required properties see Recording and archiving paths on page 106 o General Recording and Archiving Paths In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration double click Cameras and Storage Information and specify required properties see Recording and archiving paths on page 84 Tip If several cameras should use the same path use the general Recording amp Archiving Paths properties There you get a template feature which lets you specify shared archiving locations in just a few clicks e Dynamic archiving paths allow greater flexibility and are highly recommended With d
226. k the XProtect Professional release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the hardware device and firmware used You do not have to configure hardware input units separately any hardware input units connected to hardware devices are automatically detected when you add the hardware devices to XProtect Professional The same goes for hardware output but hardware output does require some simple configuration in XProtect Professional If you want to configure hardware output and automatically trigger output when events occur so that for example lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected in video see Add a hardware output on page 127 and Configure hardware output on event on page 130 About events and output Events and output of various types can be used for automatically triggering actions in XProtect Professional Examples of actions starting or stopping recording on cameras switching to a particular video frame rate triggering e mail and or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions etc Events can also be used for activating hardware output You can also configure events and output to generate alarms see About alarms on page 192 Events can be divided in to e Internal events system related for example motion server responding not responding archiving problems lack of disk space etc www milestonesys com 124 Advanced con
227. l second minute or hour Required average frame rate for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode The speedup feature lets you use a higher than normal frame rate if motion is detected and or an event occurs When you enable speedup further columns for specifying speedup details become available Speedup frame rate for viewing video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode Required average frame rate for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera Select number
228. l 8 1 Specify how often motion detection analysis is carried out on video from the camera The default is every 240 milliseconds close to CUP once a quarter of a second The interval is applied regardless of Detection interval your cameras frame rate settings Adjusting this setting can help lower the amount of system resources used on motion detection Specify whether the full image or a selected percentage of the image should be analyzed For example by specifying 25 every fourth pixel is analyzed instead of all pixels reducing the system resources used but also offering less accurate motion detection Detection resolution Privacy masking Ask yourself whether there are any areas of the camera image that must be masked from viewing For example if the camera points in a way so that it catches the window of a private building the privacy of the residents must be respected In that case you can mask areas of the image by configuring the settings below Enable Enable the Privacy Masking feature Toggle the grid on and off Toggling the grid off may provide a less obscured view of the preview image selection of areas which should be excluded from privacy masking takes place the same way as when the grid is visible When on the preview image will be Show grid divided into small sections by a grid To define areas which should be excluded from privacy masking drag the mouse over the areas in the preview image while pressing
229. l local drives are available you can improve performance by distributing individual cameras databases across several drives Only editable if not using dynamic paths for archiving see About archiving on page 143 Path to the folder in which the camera s archived recordings should be stored Default is C MediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can specify a path to a local or network drive If you change the archiving path and there are existing archived recordings at the old location you will be asked whether you want to move the archived recordings to the new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Note that if you move archived recordings XProtect Professional will also archive what is currently in the camera database In case you wonder why the camera database is empty just after you have moved archived recordings this is the reason Total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings from the camera that is recordings in the camera s database as well as any archived recordings Default is 30 days Note that the retention time covers the total amount of time you want to keep recordings for In earlier XProtect Professional versions time limits were specified separately for the database and archives The template can help you configure similar properties quickly For example if you have 20 cameras and you want a particular frame r
230. m feature lets you use the alternative stream of the camera It enables two independent streams to the recording server a stream for live viewing and another stream for recording purposes with different resolution encoding and frame rate Enable dedicated live stream Select the type of the live stream Stream settings for viewing live Stream video and for recording video may very well be different in order to get the best result Resolution Select the resolution of the camera FPS Select the camera s live frame rate per second FPS Why are there three different places where can configure frame rates for video The first Live frame rate is for the regular recording stream The second Live frame rate is for when speeding up recordings in connection with motion detection or similar And the third FPS is for the additional stream used for live viewing If the camera uses MPEG video format With MPEG you can define frame rate and other settings Frame rate for viewing live and recorded video from the camera Frame rate per second P Select number of frames per second www milestonesys com 103 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Record keyframes only Record all frames on motion Record all frames on event Start Event Stop Event Dual stream Administrator s Manual Keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames record
231. manual events as required no matter whether List of defined global events they are global or camera specific A sign next to the Global node and cameras indicates that one or more global manual events have already been configured A sign next to a camera indicates that one or more manual events have already been configured for that camera Specify a name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp J Event name Some cameras only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details www milestonesys com 137 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Only available if e mail notification see Configure e mail notifications on page 165 is enabled Select if XProtect Professional should automatically send an e mail when the event occurs Recipients are defined as part of the e mail notification configuration When using e mail notifications also bear in mind individual cameras scheduling see E mail notification on page 156 Only available if e mail notification see Configure e mail notifications on page 165 is enabled Select to include an image Attach image from camera recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail notification then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send e mail if this event occurs O
232. mmediately before and after an event took place from the camera to the surveillance system via e mail Pre and post alarm images should not be confused with the XProtect Professional pre and post recording feature see Recording on page 105 Performs integrity checks on XProtect Professional log files For more information see Overview of Logs Manages all alarms and map related communication It stores events image files and map configurations and makes status information about the surveillance system available 183 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Manages the communication between the Recording Server and Milestone Mobile service mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets and between the Recording Server and web browsers If you run a Custom installation you can choose not to install the Mobile server and or the Event Server If you do so the Mobile service and or the Event Server service will not be seen in your Services overview Start and stop services On an XProtect Professional server several services see About services on page 183 by default run in the background If you need to you can start and stop each service separately 1 In the Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration and select Services This will display the status of each service 2 You can now stop each service by clicking the Stop button When a service is
233. mple if your organization is very large and spread over many geographical locations or in case your organization wants to create a redundancy solution this allows you to use several master servers in a master slave setup How many slave servers can use in a master slave setup Up to four servers can be defined as slave servers under a designated master server using the same Software License Code How do I switch around which server is master and which server is slave If you want a slave server to become a master server simply clear Enable as master server on the original master server and click OK In the Management Application s navigation pane right click the slave server which you want to become master server and select Properties Then select Enable as master server Next click Add to add slave servers to the new master server How do I ensure that am actually connected to my slaves You can verify the connection to your slaves by clicking Update Status and let the system report the number of connected slaves back to you Event Server installation in a master slave setup If you are planning to run a master slave setup it is important that you run Typical installation on the master server and Custom installation where you deselect installing the Event Server service on the slave server s This is because there can only be one event server service in a master slave setup If more than one Event Server service is installed the maste
234. n of irrelevant motion for example if a camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams will not be able to connect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time therefore it is recommended to stop see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when you configure such devices for motion detection and PTZ See also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 For each camera for which exclude regions are relevant use the list in the left side of the wizard window to select the camera and define its exclude regions Exclude regions are camera specific and must therefore be configured individually for each camera on which they are required When you have selected a camera you will see a preview from the camera You define regions to exclude in the preview which is divided into small sections by a grid e Tomake the grid visible select the Show Grid check box e To define exclude regions drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in blue Tip With the Include All button you can quickly select all grid sections in the preview This can be advantageous if you want to disable mot
235. n properties for many cameras in one go Either in order to speed up things or because the properties in question are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to individual cameras In XProtect Professional the term recording means saving video and if applicable audio from a camera in the camera s database on the surveillance system server Video audio is often saved only when there is a reason to do so for example as long as motion is detected when an event occurs and until another event occurs or within a certain period of time All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Note that all of the Video Recording properties can also be specified individually for each camera see Recording on page 105 Template Apply Template Camera Name www milestonesys com The template can help you configure similar properties quickly Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording path archiving path and retention time for all of them Instead of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times you can simply enter them once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button The name as it appears in the Manageme
236. n the exported recording took place Duration column The length of the exported recording User column The name of the user who provided the exported recording MB column The size of the exported recording Note that every time you change a setting in the Mobile server settings you must click the Apply button followed by the Save button Mobile Server Manager About Mobile Server Manager The Mobile Server Manager is a tray controlled feature connected to Mobile server Right clicking the Mobile Server Manager icon in the system tray opens a menu from which Mobile server functionality can be easily accessed You can e Open XProtect Web Client see Access XProtect Web Client on page 17 e Start stop and restart the Mobile service see Start stop and restart Mobile service on page 192 e Fill in or change surveillance server credentials see Fill in edit surveillance server credentials on page 192 e Show edit port numbers on page 192 e Edit certificate on page 191 e Open today s log file see Access logs and exports on page 191 e Open log folder see Access logs and exports on page 191 e Open export folder see Access logs and exports on page 191 e Show Mobile server status see About show status on page 190 e Access the XProtect Mobile Help website where you find manuals FAQS and product demonstration videos About show status If you right click the Mobile Server Manager and select Show Status o
237. n you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go In the case of Manual recording it is because the properties are shared by all cameras www milestonesys com 92 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 When manual recording is enabled Smart Client users with the necessary rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 can manually start recording if they see something of interest while viewing live video from a camera which is not already recording If enabled manual recording can take place even if recording for individual cameras see Recording on page 105 is set to Never or Conditionally When started from the Smart Client such user driven recording will always take place for a fixed time for example for five minutes Select check box to enable manual recording and specify further Enable manual recording details Period of time in seconds during which user driven recording will take place Default duration is 300 seconds corresponding to five minutes Default duration of manual recording Maximum allowed period of time for user driven recording This maximum is not relevant in connection with manual recording started from the Smart Client since such manual recording will always take place for a fixed time In some installations it is Maximum duration
238. na nnn nennen ennn 142 About scheduling 12 ccce cce ccei ccce ccer cc recedere crea ano c rana aa a apa O caua 142 PAD OUT archiving e 143 Configure general scheduling and archiving eese 149 Configure camera specific schedules esses eene nnn 150 General scheduling properties eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseee eese nenne nnns nnn nennt nnn 152 Camera specific scheduling properties eeeeeeeee eren eene nennen 155 MATRIX e XO 157 About Matrix video sharing eese eeeeeee eene enne nennt nnne nnn nnns 157 About Matrix recipients eeeeeee esee essen enne nennen nnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nn nnns 157 enia iania 158 Matrix properties cire ccce ie ccce ecco rcu cL ret inne tue rne usate uada Dima das nne EEN 158 DOGS iis Ebo ame 161 frd m 161 Configure system event and audit logging eese 163 Log propr n2 163 EET ee 165 PAD OUT Cat ea eT 165 Configure e mail notifications eeseeeee esee esses eene n entente nn SEENEN nn tnnt annt Sr 165 E mail propertles 2 ccce ccce ccce ccce tr ccce cue en Crete tne apte DDm ada a nm
239. nal to automatically move recordings to your archiving path s You can specify up to 24 archiving times per day with minimum one hour between each one Archiving Times Select the hour minute and second values and click the up and down buttons to increase or decrease values or simply overwrite the selected value and then click Add The more you expect to record the more often you should archive Recording and archiving settings Select recording and archiving see About archiving on page 143 paths for each individual camera All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited www milestonesys com 64 Wizards Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Recording Path Archiving Path Retention Time Administrator s Manual Path to the folder in which the camera s database should be stored Default is CAMediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can only specify a path to a folder on a local drive You cannot specify a path to a network drive If you use a network drive it is not be possible to save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable If you change the recording path and you have existing recordings at the old location you are asked whether you want to move the recordings to the new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Tip If you have several cameras and severa
240. nce ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 5 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose the data deleted as part of the database resizing process When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size Tip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in the Smart Client in log files and if set up through an e mail notification About archiving schedules There are two ways in which to configure archiving schedules e While you configure your cameras through the Configure Video and Recording wizard see The Configure Video and Recording wizard on page 56 in which case you configure your archiving schedule on the wizard s Drive selection page e As part of the general Scheduling and Archiving properties In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Scheduling and Archiving select Properties select Archiving in the dialog and specify required properties View archived recordings You can view archived recordings via the Smart Client Use for example all of the Smart Client s advanced features video browsing and export for archived recordings Stored archives For archi
241. nced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Automatic response if running out of disk space If XProtect Professional runs of disk space while archiving you can set up an automatic response Two scenarios can occur depending on whether the camera database drive is different from or identical to the archiving drive Different drives Automatic archiving if database drive runs out of disk space In case the XProtect Professional server is running out of disk space and the archiving drive is different from the camera database drive and archiving has not taken place within the last hour archiving will automatically begin in an attempt to free up disk space This will happen regardless of any archiving schedules The server is considered to be running out of disk space if e there is less than 10 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1 5 GB per camera e the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 10 disk space left On the archiving drive XProtect Professional automatically checks that the space required for data from a camera to
242. nclusion in the alarm definition even though they are not themselves triggering the alarm This can be relevant for example if you have selected an external event message such as a door being opened as the source of your alarm By defining one or more cameras near the door you could attach the cameras recordings of the incident to the alarm Select a map to tie to the alarm definition The selected map will automatically be shown in the Smart Client whenever the alarm is listed This might help you to quicker identify the physical location of the alarm Select a default user responsible for the alarm You can only select from users allowed to view all cameras and or other devices selected as source s for the event causing the alarm Select a priority High Medium or Low for the alarm Priorities can be used for sorting purposes and workflow control in the Smart Client Select a category to which the alarm should initially be assigned This could be for example Building01 Burglary ElevatorEast or similar depending on which categories have been defined Define an event to be triggered by the alarm in the Smart Client if needed Select if the alarm should automatically be closed upon a particular event This is possible for alarms triggered by some but not all events See also Alarm data settings on page 197 and Alarm sound settings see Sound settings on page 198 for further information on how to configure alarm sett
243. nd Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required 3 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Log properties XProtect Professional can generate various types of logs When you configure logs you can define the following www milestonesys com 163 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Administrator s Manual Logs Management Application log Recording Server service log Image Server service log and Image Import service log Path Days to log Event Log Path Days to log Audit Log Enable audit logging Path www milestonesys com These log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users folder for the operating system you are using To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder A new log file is created each day the Management Application and or the services are used A log file older than the number of days specified in the field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stored for seven days To specify another number of days max 9999
244. nd select Cameras and Storage Information 2 View the Storage Usage Summary for information about which drives are available what drives are used for the size of each drive as well as how much video data other data and free space there is in each drive View video from cameras in Management Application You can view live video from single cameras directly in the Management Application 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration and expand Cameras and Storage Information 2 Select the required camera to view live video from that camera Above the live video you will find a summary of the most important properties for the selected camera Below the live video you will find information about the camera s resolution and average image file size For cameras using MPEG or H 264 you will also see the bit rate in Mbit second IMPORTANT Viewing of live video in the Management Application may under certain circumstances affect any simultaneous recording from the camera in question Especially three scenarios are important to consider 1 Some cameras supporting multistreaming may halve their frame rate or respond with other negative effects when a second stream is opened 2 If a camera delivers live video in a very high quality de coding of images may increase the load on the Recording Server service which may in turn affect ongoing recordings negatively 3 Cameras that do not support multiple
245. nd output ssseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeee eene nnne nennen nnn nennt nan nennen innen ns 124 Overview of events and output usseesesieeseiseeeeeseeeene nennen nnne nn nnns nna sinn nnn annen 125 Add an analytics event cce cene ren rrt naut nnne mnnn nnnm auae om ek Ea sn ep eua nnana 127 Add a hardware input event eeeeeeeseseeeeeesseeenee eene nn nnne tnmen nnn r innen ran nennen 127 Add a hardware output eeseeeeeeeeeseeee esses eene nnn nnne nnn nnne nnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn nennt nnns 127 Add ERES EENS 128 Add a generic EE 129 Generate alarms based on analytics events eese 129 Add a timer ELE 129 Configure hardware output on event eese eseeeeeeen ener nnn nnne tnnt 130 Configure general event handling eeeeeeeeeeseee sienne enne enne nnnm nnn nnn 130 Test a generic event eeeeeeseeeieeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eene nennen nnnm nhan nnnm nnmnnn nas snnm nra n nnnm 131 General event properties eeeeeeeeeiieeseiseeeeeen eese en nennen nnn n nnne nni nn sana natns sn nnmnnn 133 Events and output properties eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees enne enne nnne nennen nnn innen 133 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 SCHEDULING AND ARCHIVING eene nennen nnn nnne nn nnn anna an
246. nd slave servers on page 174 throughout your organization This enables monitoring and instant overview of alarms and possible technical problems within your systems The event server is automatically installed on and runs in the background of the XProtect Professional surveillance system server The surveillance system s alarm data is stored in a SQL Server Express database The SQL database is a lightweight yet powerful version of a full SQL server which is automatically installed on and runs in the background of your XProtect Professional surveillance System server Handles access to the surveillance system for users logging in with clients The Image Server service is automatically installed and runs in the background on the XProtect Professional surveillance system server You can manage the service through the Management Application Manage which XProtect Professional related features your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server 11 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Designed for Milestone XProtect surveillance systems the XProtect Smart Client is a powerful easy to use client application for the daily operations of security installations A new streamlined interface helps improve usability making it easy to monitor XProtect Smart Client installations of all sizes manage security incidents and access and expo
247. nect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time Therefore we recommended stopping see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when configuring such devices for motion detection and PTZ See also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 Audio About recording audio If you record audio it is important that you note the following e Only audio from microphones is recorded Only incoming audio that is audio recorded by microphones attached to hardware devices is recorded Outgoing audio that is what operators say when they talk through speakers attached to hardware devices is not recorded e Audio recording affects video storage capacity Audio is recorded to the associated camera s database Therefore it is important to bear in mind that the database is likely to become full earlier if you record audio and video than if you only record video The fact that the database becomes full is not in itself a problem since XProtect Professional automatically archives see About archiving on page 143 data if the database becomes full However you may need additional archiving space if you record audio o Example If you use MPEG4 each one second video GOP Group Of Pictures will be stored in one record in the database Each second of audio will also be stored in one record in the database This reduces the database s video storage capacity to half its capacity
248. nistration responsibilities you do not have to deal with SLCs System administrators use SLCs when installing and registering the software SMS Short Message Service or Systems Management Server 1 Short Message Service a system for sending text messages to mobile phones 2 Systems Management Server a Microsoft tool which lets system administrators build up databases of hardware and software on local networks The databases can then among other things be used for distributing and installing software applications over local networks SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol standard for sending e mail messages between mail servers Subnet A part of a network Dividing a network into subnets can be advantageous for management and security reasons and may in some cases also help improve performance On TCP IP based networks a subnet is basically a part of a network on which all devices share the same prefix in their IP addresses for example 123 123 123 xxx where the first three numbers 123 123 123 are the shared prefix Network administrators www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual use subnet masks to divide networks into subnets TCP Transmission Control Protocol protocol or standard used for sending data packets across networks TCP is often combined with another protocol IP Internet Protocol The combination known as TCP IP allows data packets to be sent back and forth between two points
249. nly available if SMS notification see Configure SMS notifications on page 168 is enabled Select if XProtect Professional should automatically send an SMS when the event Send SMS if this event occurs occurs Recipients are defined as part of the SMS notification configuration When using SMS notifications also bear in mind individual cameras scheduling see SMS notification on page 156 Delete Delete a selected event Add a new event When Global or a specific camera is selected clicking Add will add a new manual event When a specific manual event is selected clicking Add will add a timer event on page 129 to the selected manual event Add Timer event When you add timer events see Add a timer event on page 129 specify the following properties Specify a name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp J Timer event name Some cameras only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Specify the amount of time that should pass between the main Timer even urs after ereventioce event occurring and the timer event in seconds or minutes Generic event When you add generic events see Test a generic event on page 131 specify the following properties www milestonesys com 138 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Event name Event port
250. nnecting computers and other devices on the internet IP address Internet Protocol address the identifier for a computer or device on a network It is used by the TCP IP protocol for routing data traffic to the intended destination An IP address consists of four numbers each between 0 and 256 separated by periods example 192 168 212 2 IPIX A technology that allows the creation and viewing of 360 degree panomorph fisheye images JPEG Also JPG Joint Photographic Experts Group widely used lossy compression technique for images K Keyframe Used in the MPEG standard for digital video compression a keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals The keyframe records the entire view of the camera whereas the frames between the keyframes record only www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files MAC address Media Access Control address 12 character hexadecimal number uniquely identifying each device on a network Manual events You can generate an event manually from the client These events are called manual events Master Slave A setup of servers where one server the master server is of higher importance than the remaining servers the slave servers With a master slave setup in XProtect Professional it is possible to combine several XProtect Professional servers and extend the number of cameras you c
251. not be edited Note that all of the properties can also be specified individually for each camera The template can help you configure similar properties quickly Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording path archiving path and retention time for all of them Instead of having Template to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times you can simply enter them once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then Apply Template use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V Camera Name www milestonesys com 84 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Shortcut Recording Path Archiving Path Retention Time www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Users of the Smart Client can take advantage of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or
252. not licensed to use all of a video encoder device s channels Example You have a video encoder device with four channels but your license for the device only allows you to use two of them In that case you can only have two channels enabled at a time the two other channels will be disabled Note that you are free to select which two channels you want to enable Contact your Milestone vendor if you need to change your number of licenses Network device type and license When you configure hardware devices on page 74 specify the following properties Address IP address or host name of the hardware device www milestonesys com 75 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 HTTP Port FTP port User name User name Password Hardware type Serial number MAC address License information Replace Hardware Device PTZ device Administrator s Manual Port to use for HTTP communication with the hardware device Default is port 80 To use the default port select Use default HTTP port e Port to use for FTP communication with the hardware device Default port is port 21 To use the default port select Use default FTP port Only required when Server requires login is selected Specify the user name required for using the SMTP server User name for the hardware device s administrator account Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer s default user names for their hardware devices
253. ns are stored and can be selected again A new session begins each time the Management Application is started as well as each time you save the whole configuration for example by clicking the Save Configuration button in the Management Application s toolbar For sessions older than the last five sessions only the latest restore point of each session is stored With the Number of old sessions to keep field you can control how many old sessions are kept When selecting to restore a configuration from a restore point the configuration from the selected restore point will be applied and used once the services are restarted see Start and stop services on page 184 If you have added new cameras or other devices to XProtect Professional after the restore point was created they will be missing if you load the restore point This is due to the fact that they were not in the system when the restore point was created In such cases you will be notified and must decide what to do with recordings from the affected devices 1 From the Management Application s File menu select Load Configuration from Restore Point 2 Inthe left part of the Restore Points dialog select the required restore point www milestonesys com 206 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Tip When you select a restore point you will in the right part of the dialog see information about the configuration state at t
254. nt Application Recordings viewed by clients are provided by the surveillance system s Image Server service The service runs in the background on the surveillance system server It does not require separate hardware To download a Smart Client users connect to the surveillance system server which will present them with a welcome page The welcome page will list the available clients and language versions Surveillance system administrators use the Download Manager to control which clients and language versions should be available to users on the welcome page The Smart Client is unlicensed and can be freely downloaded and installed as many times as needed Install the XProtect Smart Client The XProtect Smart Client must be installed on your computer before you can use it Typically you download the XProtect Smart Client from the surveillance system server then install it on your computer Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install the XProtect Smart Client from a DVD Tip To uninstall the XProtect Smart Client follow the normal Windows procedure for uninstalling programs see the Windows Help for more information Surveillance system administrators For information on silent installation when available see the separate administrator s documentation for your surveillance system s server software e Install from the surveillance server on page 13 e Install from a DVD on page 14 Install from the
255. nt Application as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V 87 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Record on Start Event Stop Event Pre recording www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Lets you select under which conditions video from the camera should be recorded e Always Record whenever the camera is enabled see General on page 100 and scheduled to be online see Online period on page 155 the latter allows for time based recording e Never Never record Live video will be displayed but since no video is kept in the database users will not be able to play back video from the camera e Motion Detection Select this to record video in which motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected Unless post recording see the following is used recording will stop immediately after the last motion is detected e Event Select this to record video when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of recording on event requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields e Motion Detection amp Event Select this to record video in whi
256. nt Application toolbar Make sure the Recording Server service is running Also make sure that the camera for which you just configured the event notification is displayed in your Smart Client and that you have camera title bars enabled in your Smart Client so that you can see the yellow event indicator In Windows Start menu select Run and type the following in the Open field o Ifyou are performing the test on the XProtect Professional server itself telnet localhost 1234 o If you are performing the test from a remote computer Substitute localhost with the IP address of the XProtect Professional server Example If the IP address of the XProtect Professional server is 123 123 123 123 type telnet 123 123 123 123 1234 This will open a Telnet window In the above examples the number 1234 indicates the port on which the XProtect Professional server listens for generic events Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose but it is possible www milestonesys com 131 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 to change this by specifying another port number as part of the general event handling configuration see Configure general event handling on page 130 If the alert and generic event port number has been changed on your system type your system s alert and generic event port number instead of 1234 6 In the Telnet window type the terms so called event substring required to tr
257. nts you can turn input received from input units attached to hardware devices into events in XProtect Professional Before you specify input for a hardware device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the hardware device Most hardware devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the release notes to verify that input controlled operation is supported for the hardware device and firmware used To add and or configure a hardware input event do the following 1 In the Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration then expand Events and Output Right click Hardware Input Events and select Enable New Input Event 2 In the Hardware Input Event Properties window s list of hardware devices expand the required hardware device to see a list of pre defined hardware input 3 Select the required types of input to use them as events The types of input often vary from camera to camera If motion detection see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is enabled in XProtect Professional for the camera in question note the input type System Motion Detection which lets you turn detected motion in the camera s video stream into an event In earlier XProtect Professional versions this was known as a VMD event Note that some types of input are mutually exclusive When you select one type of input you may therefore note that other types of input
258. ny number of XProtect Professional installations throughout your organization www milestonesys com 192 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 You can configure alarms to be generated based on either e Internal events system related for example motion server responding not responding archiving problems lack of disk space etc e External events integrated for example MIP plug in events In addition the Alarms feature deals with general alarms settings and alarm logging Configuring alarms Alarm configuration includes among other things e Dynamic setup of alarm handling see Add an alarm on page 195 based on users access rights e Central overview of all components servers cameras and external units e Setup of central logging of all incoming alarms and system information e Handling of plug ins allowing customized integration of other systems for example external access control or VCA based systems Viewing alarms The following can play a role with regards to alarms and who can view control manage them and to what degree This is because alarms are controlled by the visibility of the object causing the alarm Source device visibility if the device causing the alarm is not set to be visible to the user the user will not be able to see the alarm in the alarm list in the Smart Client See Configure User Access wizard on page 68 Right to trigger manually def
259. o speed up things or because the properties in question are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to individual cameras All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Note that the properties Online Period Speedup E mail Notification SMS Notification and PTZ Patrolling can also be specified individually for each camera The template can help you configure similar properties quickly Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording path archiving path and retention time for all of them Instead of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times you can simply enter them once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks Template Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then Apply Template use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as Camera s in clients Select the required profile for example Always on for the online schedule see Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 for the camera s in question You specify a camera s online periods by creating schedule profiles based on i e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 Online shown in pink e Events within periods of time example from Ev
260. o will investigate the issue for you Activate License Offline Precondition Add at least one device see The Add Hardware Devices wizard on page 44 to your XProtect Professional system www milestonesys com 37 Licenses Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 This starts the grace period of 30 days for the device in question You must activate a license for the device before the end of the grace period Step 1 Export license for activation offline To export a license file with your currently added devices for activation do the following 1 Onthe Management Application s toolbar click File Manage License Offline Export License for Activation 2 Specify a file name and a location for the license request Irq file automatically generated by XProtect Professional If your computer does not have internet access use external removable data storage 3 If needed move the external data storage with the Irq file to a computer with internet access Open an internet browser and go to Milestone s website at www milestonesys com Select Software Registration from the top menu If you have used the Software Registration Service Center before log in with your e mail and password Otherwise click New to the System to create a new user account and register your SLC 1 Under Current SLCs select the SLC 2 Inthe menu for SLC properties use the Upload LRQ function to upload the generated Irq fil
261. obally unique identifier unique 128 bit number used to identify components on a Windows system H 264 A standard for compressing and decompressing video data a codec H 264 is a relatively recent codec it compresses video more effectively than older codecs and it provides more flexibility for use in a variety of network environments Hardware device Technically speaking cameras are not added to XProtect Professional rather to hardware devices This is because hardware devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based XProtect Professional primarily identifies units based on their IP addresses or host names Even though each hardware device has its own IP address or host name several cameras microphones and so on can be attached to a single hardware device and share the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video encoder devices Each camera microphone and so on www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual can be configured individually even when several of them are attached to a single hardware device Host A computer connected to a TCP IP network A host has its own IP address but may depending on network configuration also have a host name to make it easily identifiable Hotspot Particular position for viewing enlarged and or high quality video in the Smart Client HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol standard for exchanging f
262. of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when motion is detected The camera will return to the normal frame rates two seconds after the last motion is detected 102 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of speedup on event requires that events have been defined and that you select On event start and stop events in the neighboring lists Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields Select required start event The camera will begin using the SI Eont speedup frame rates when the start event occurs Select required stop event The camera will return to the normal Sop Erani frame rates when the stop event occurs Tip Speedup does not necessarily have to be based on motion or events you can also use scheduling see Speedup on page 156 to configure speedup based on particular periods of time If you prefer such time based speedup you should still enable the use of speedup by selecting the Enable speedup check box Dual stream This feature is only available on cameras supporting dual stream This additional strea
263. of input Enable www milestonesys com Select check box to use selected type of input as an event in XProtect Professional and specify further properties 135 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Specify a name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp J Event name Some cameras only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Only relevant if using pre and post alarm images a feature available for selected cameras only it enables sending of images from immediately before an event took place from the camera to the surveillance system via e mail Pre and post alarm images should not be confused the pre and post recording feature see Recording on page 105 particular to XProtect Professional Lets you select which camera you want to receive pre and or post alarm images from Only relevant if using pre alarm images a feature available for selected cameras only Specify required number of pre alarm Number of pre alarm images images Allowed number may differ from camera to camera allowed range is displayed to the right of the field Images from camera Only relevant if using pre alarm images a feature available for selected cameras only Specify required frame rate Used in Frames per second combination with the Number of pre
264. of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events 1 In the Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration then expand Events and Output Right click Generic Events and select Add New Generic Event 2 In the Generic Event Properties window click the Add button and specify required properties see Generic event on page 138 When ready click OK or click the Add button to add a timer event to the event you have just created 3 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Generate alarms based on analytics events Generating alarms based on analytics events is normally a three step process 1 Enable the analytics events feature and set up its security A list of allowed addresses can be used to control who can send event data to the system and on which port the server listens 2 Create the analytics event possibly with a description of the event and test it 3 Usethe analytics event as the source of an alarm definition see Alarms definition on page 195 As indicated to use VCA based events see VCA on page 222 most often a third party VCA tool is required for supplying data to XProtect Professional Which VCA tool to use is entirely up to you as long as the data supplied by the tool adheres to the applied formatting rules described in the Milestone Analytics Events Developers Manual Contact Milestone for more details
265. ofessional 8 1 Device In XProtect Professional a camera video encoder input device or output device connected to a recording server DirectX A Windows extension providing advanced multimedia capabilities DNS Domain Name System system allowing translation between alphabetic host names for example mycomputer or domain names for example www mydomain com and numeric IP addresses for example 192 168 212 2 Many people find alphabetic names easier to remember than numeric IP addresses Driver A program used for controlling communicating with a device DST Daylight saving time temporarily advancing of clocks during the summer so that afternoons have more daylight and mornings have less Dual stream Some cameras support two independent streams which can be sent to the recording server one for live viewing and another for playback purposes Each stream has its own resolution encoding and frame rate DVR Digital video recorder device that records video in a digital format to a hard disk drive embedded in the DVR itself E www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Event Server A server that stores and handles incoming alarm data and events from all XProtect Professional servers The Event Server enables powerful monitoring and provides an instant overview of alarms and possible technical problems within your systems F Fisheye A type of lens that allows the creation an
266. ognized If you enter several user names separate each name with a semicolon Example Brian Hannah Karen Wayne 3 When done click OK When a user who has been added from a local database logs in with a client the user should not specify any server name PC name or IP address as part of the user name Example of a correctly specified user name USERO01 not PC001 USEROO01 The user should of course still specify a password and any required server information Configure User Access wizard access summary The access summary simply lists which cameras your users will have access to When using the wizard all users you have added will have access all to cameras including any new cameras added at a later stage You can however limit individual users access to cameras by changing their individual rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 www milestonesys com 70 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Advanced configuration Hardware devices About hardware devices You add cameras and other hardware devices such as video encoders to your XProtect Professional system through the Add Hardware Devices wizard see The Add Hardware Devices wizard on page 44 If microphones or speakers are attached to a hardware device they are automatically added as well About the Replace Hardware Device wizard The Replace Hardware Device wizard helps you replace a hardware device that
267. ommand in the same directory For XProtect Smart Client gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe arguments args xml quiet For XProtect Professional www milestonesys com 27 Install and upgrade Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 MilestoneXProtectXProtect Professionallnstaller exe arguments args xml quiet Upgrade About upgrading When you upgrade from one product to a more advanced product you get access to new functionality but you can also expand the use of the functionality that were already available Your settings from the previous product are transferred to the new product This means that you will sometimes need to update the settings of your old product in order to make use of the expanded functionality For further information about the various differences between products check the Milestone website at www milestonesys com Example If you upgrade from XProtect Go to XProtect Professional you should among other things be aware of e Smart Client In XProtect Go only one Smart Client can be connected at a time When you upgrade you get the possibility of connecting more Smart Clients Since you come from XProtect Go the Management Application is set to only allow one Smart Client connection at a time You can change this setting manually in the Management Application In general you will gain the full use of Smart Client functionality when upgrading e Number of Cameras XProte
268. on A dialog box may ask you whether you wish to print the selected topic only or all topics under the selected heading when this is the case select Print the selected topic and then click OK Tip When you print a help topic it is printed as you see it on your screen Therefore if a topic contains expanding drop down links click each required drop down link to display the text to include it when you print This allows you to create targeted printouts that contain exactly the amount of information you require www milestonesys com 33 Getting started Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Licenses About licenses When you purchase XProtect Professional you also purchase a certain number of licenses for device channels Device channels are typically cameras but could also be dedicated input output boxes One device channel license enables you to run one camera or one dedicated input output box You can use and define an unlimited number of microphones speakers inputs and outputs When you have installed the various XProtect Professional components configured the system and added recording servers and cameras through the Management Application the surveillance system initially runs on temporary licenses that need to be activated before a certain period ends This is called the grace period If grace periods have expired on one or more of your devices and no licenses have been activated recording servers
269. on on page 210 With dynamic archiving paths you specify a number of different archiving paths usually across several drives If the drive containing the camera s database is among the path you have selected for dynamic archiving XProtect Professional will always try to archive to that path first If not XProtect Professional automatically archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at any time provided there is not a camera database using that drive See also Dynamic path selection on page 86 108 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Event notification When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras properties include event notification About event notifications Event notification lets you inform Smart Client users that an event has occurred on the XProtect Professional system Event notification can be valuable for client users as they will be able to quickly detect that an event has occurred even though their focus was perhaps on something else the moment the event occurred Tip Even though event notification is configured separately for each camera you can select between all events on your XProtect Professional system regardless whether events are manual generic or originate on another hardware device than the camera itself In the Smart Client event notification is given by a y
270. on local networks You can then use the databases for distributing and installing software applications such as the XProtect Smart Client over local networks Install your surveillance server software Do not install XProtect Professional on a mounted drive A mounted drive is a drive that is attached to an empty folder on an NTFS NT File System volume with a label or name instead of a drive letter If you use mounted drives critical system features may not work as intended You will for example not receive any warnings if the system runs out of disk space Prerequisites Shut down any existing surveillance software If you are upgrading read Upgrade from a previous version on page 28 first 1 Run the installation file Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Click the Run button if you receive a warning 2 When the installation wizard starts select language for the installer and then click Continue 3 Select if you want to install a trial version of XProtect Professional or indicate the location of your license file 4 Read and accept the license agreement and indicate if you want to participate in the Milestone data collection program 5 Select Typical or Custom installation If you select Custom installation you can select application language which features to install and where to install them 6 Letthe installation wizard complete IMPORTANT If you are installing on a
271. onditional is selected Specify the Enable post recording number of seconds for which you want to record video after recording stop conditions that is motion end or stop event are met How does pre and post recording work XProtect Professional receives video in a continuous stream from the camera whenever the camera is enabled and scheduled to be online This is what lets you view live video but it also means that XProtect Professional can easily store received video for a number of seconds in its memory a k a buffering If it turns out that the buffered video is needed for pre or post recording it is automatically appended to the recording If not it is simply discarded Note that manual recording on page 92 may be enabled With manual recording Smart Client users with the necessary rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 can manually start recording if they see something of interest while viewing live video from a camera which is not already recording If enabled manual recording can take place even if recording for individual cameras is set to Never or Conditionally Recording and archiving paths When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras properties include www milestonesys com 106 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Path to the folder in which the camera s database should be store
272. only pixels that change This helps greatly reducing the size of MPEG files Select the check box if you only want to record keyframes Note that you can specify exceptions if motion is detected or events occur see the following Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record keyframes only Select this check box to record all frames when motion is detected Two seconds after the last motion is detected the camera will return to recording keyframes only Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record keyframes only Select this check box to record all frames when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of this feature requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events in the neighboring lists Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields Use when recording on Event or Motion Detection amp Event Select required start event The camera will begin recording all frames when the start event occurs Select required stop event The camera will again only recording keyframes when the stop event occurs This feature is only available on cameras supporting dual stream Enable dedicated live stream Stream Resolution FPS Audio This additional stream feature lets you use the alternative stream of the camera It enables two independent streams to the recording server a
273. onnected access clients type 0 zero in the Max number of clients field A four minute session timeout period applies for client sessions on XProtect Professional In many cases client users may not notice this at all However the session timeout period will be very evident if you set the Max number of clients value to 1 When that is the case and the single allowed client user logs out four minutes must pass before it will be possible to log in again Local IP ranges You can specify IP address ranges which XProtect Professional should recognize as coming from a local network This can be relevant if different subnets are used across you local network 1 Click the Add button 2 In the Start Address column specify the first IP address in the required range 3 In the End Address column specify the last IP address in the required range Tip If required an IP address range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 4 Repeatif other local IP address ranges are required Language support and XML encoding You can select the language character set that should be used by the XProtect Professional server and clients www milestonesys com 173 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Select required language character set Example If the surveillance server runs a Japanese version of Character encoding Language Windows select Japanese Provided acces
274. ons on page 115 it is possible to make the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs When associating events with preset positions on a PTZ camera you can select between all events defined on your XProtect Professional system you are not limited to selecting events defined ona particular hardware device 1 Inthe Events list in the left side of the window select the required event Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields 2 In the PTZ Preset Position list in the right side of the window select the required preset position For this purpose you can only use an event once per PTZ camera However different events can be used for making the PTZ camera go to the same preset position Example o Event 1 makes the PTZ camera go to preset position A o Event 2 makes the PTZ camera go to preset position B www milestonesys com 120 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 o Event 3 makes the PTZ camera go to preset position A If later you want to end the association between a particular event and a particular preset position clear the field containing the event After you have made the PTZ setting changes restart services see Start and stop services on page 184 Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot con
275. ontain the expected information Log integrity can t be Thus log integrity cannot be guaranteed guaranteed Log file name not found The log file was not present Log file name is empty The log file was present but empty Last line changed removed in TNT enar TE log file name The last line of the log file did not match validation criteria Encrypted data missing in log file name near line The encrypted part of the log line in question was not present Inconsistency found in log file name near line The log line does not match the encrypted part Inconsistency found in log file name at beginning of log file The log file header is not correct This situation is most likely to occur if a user has attempted to delete the beginning of a log file Configure system event and audit logging XProtect Professional can to generate various logs To configure logging do the following 1 Inthe Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Logs and select Properties 2 Specify required properties see Log properties on page 163 for o General system logs Management Application log Recording Server service log Image Server service log Image Import service log o The event log o The audit log Note that only audit logging can be disabled enabled by administrators all other logs are compulsory XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on a
276. or Closed With three seconds of pre recording video will be recorded from three seconds before Door Opened occurs and until Door Closed occurs Select this check box to record video in which motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected Unless post recording see the following is used recording will stop immediately after the last motion is detected Built in motion detection www milestonesys com 105 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Select this check box to record video when an event occurs and until another event occurs Use of recording on event requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events On event in the neighboring lists Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields Select required start event Recording will begin when the start Start Event Role eines d event occurs or earlier if using pre recording see the following Select required stop event Recording will end when the stop event SEN occurs or later if using post recording see the following Available only when the option Conditional is selected Specify the Enable pre recording number of seconds for which you want to record video from before recording start conditions that is motion or start event are met Available only when the option C
277. or account In the extremely rare cases where a particular user name has previously been required for a device but you now want the user name to be blank you cannot use the CSV file to specify HardwareUsername blank The reason is that no information is interpreted as leave the user name as it currently is If you need the new user name to be lt blank gt you should not change it through the CCV file Instead change it as part of the hardware device s network device type and license properties after you have imported the other changes through the CSV file www milestonesys com 52 Wizards Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 HardwarePassword HardwareDeviceName HardwareDriverlD CameraName number CameraShortcut number GenerateNewCameraGuid opti onal number PreBufferLength optional number PostBufferLength optional number RecordingPath optional number www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Password for hardware device s administrator account In the extremely rare cases where a particular password has previously been required for a device but you now want the password to be blank you cannot use the CSV file to specify lt blank gt The reason is that no information is interpreted as celeave the password as it currently is If you need the new password to be lt blank gt you should not change it through the CSV file Instead change it as part of the hardware device s netwo
278. or the changes to take effect About protecting recording databases from corruption In the Management Application you can select which action to take if a camera database becomes corrupted The actions include several database repair options While being able to select such actions is highly valuable it is of course even better to take steps to ensure that your camera databases do not become corrupted www milestonesys com 210 Common tasks Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Power outages use a UPS The single most common reason for corrupt databases is the recording server being shut down abruptly without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly This may happen due to power outages due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server s power cable or similar The best way of protecting your recording servers from being shut down abruptly is to equip each of your recording servers with a UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply The UPS works as a battery driven secondary power source providing the necessary power for saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities UPSs vary in sophistication but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files for alerting system administrators etc Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization s environment is an individual process When assessing your needs however do
279. ory then immediately move the archive to the archiving location you have specified Archiving directly to a network drive can mean that archiving time varies depending on the available bandwidth on the network First storing the archive locally then moving it speeds up the archiving procedure and reduces delays in case of network problems If you archive to a network drive the regular camera database can only be stored on a local drive attached directly to the XProtect Professional server About dynamic archive paths With dynamic archiving paths you specify a number of different archiving paths usually across several drives Using dynamic paths is recommended and is the default setting when you configure cameras through the Configure video amp recording wizard see About video and recording configuration on page 77 If the path containing the camera s database is on one of the drives you have selected for dynamic archiving XProtect Professional will always try to archive to that drive first If not XProtect Professional automatically archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at any time provided a camera database is not using that drive The drive that has the most available space may change during the archiving process and archiving may therefore happen to several archiving drives during the same process This will have no impact on how users find and view archived recordings Dynamic archiving paths are gen
280. osition of the green circle Move the X center slider to the left or right as required Alternatively specify a value between 0 and 800 in the field next to the slider Controls the vertical Y position of the green circle Move the slider to the left in order to move the circle up or to the right in order to Y center move the circle down Alternatively specify a value between 0 and 800 in the field next to the slider Toggle between viewing the circular fisheye view and the flattened rectangular view resulting from your settings When you preview the flattened view the following navigation buttons become available for moving around within the flattened view Enable preview Use after navigating to a suitable viewpoint using the navigation buttons Sets the current viewpoint as home position that is default Set as Home position so that when client users viewing the camera click their clients Home button their view of the camera changes to that position EI Moves the flattened view up www milestonesys com 114 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Moves the flattened view up and to the left EI D Moves the flattened view up and to the right ET Moves the flattened view to the left WI Moves the flattened view to its home position that is default position Won Moves the flattened view to the right T Moves the flattened view down and to the left Moves
281. ostname If the Image Server service has been configured with a port number other than the default port 80 you configure this as part of the server access properties users must specify the port number as well separated from the IP address or hostname by a colon http surveillance server IP address or hostname port number The content of the welcome page is managed through the Download Manager therefore the welcome page will often look different in different organizations www milestonesys com 19 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Initial look Immediately after you install XProtect Professional the welcome page will provide access to a Smart Client in all languages In addition the Smart Client can be downloaded in 32 or 64 bit if you run a 64 bit operating system and in 32 bit if you run a 32 bit operating system This initial look of the welcome page is automatically provided through the Download Manager s default configuration for more information see Default configuration of Download Manager in the following Default configuration of Download Manager The Download Manager has a default configuration This ensures that your organization s users can access standard features without the surveillance system administrator having to set up anything The Download Manager configuration is represented in a tree structure Download Manager s Tree Structure Explained e The
282. overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V Users of the Smart Client can take advantage of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Camera Name Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera A camera Camera shortcut number shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must not be longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers Cam 3 123456789 More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the separate documentation for the Smart Client These properties are to a large extent camera specific Since such properties vary from camera to camera descriptions in the following are for guidance only If the selected camera is accessible a live preview is displayed Click the Camera Settings button to open a separate window with properties for the selected camera The video properties typically let you control bandwidth brightness compression contrast resolution rotation etc by overwriting existing values of selecting new ones When you adjust video settings you can for most cameras preview the effect of your settings in an image below the fields Video settings may feature an Incl
283. ow specify who should be able to access your XProtect Professional system and how Do you want password protection for the Management Application Who should have client access and with which rights See Configure User Access wizard on page 68 Add basic users on page 177 Add user groups on page 178 and Configure user and group rights on page 179 The above list represents the configuration steps that most administrators are likely to cover Additional configuration is of course possible for example if your organization wants to use the Matrix see Configure Matrix on page 158 video sharing feature or similar www milestonesys com 32 Getting started Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Note that the behavior of the Management Application can be customized see Change restore Management Application behavior on page 41 Descriptions here are however always based on the Management Application s default behavior Use the built in help system To use the XProtect Professional built in help system click the Help button in the Management Application s toolbar Alternatively press the F1 key on your keyboard The help system opens in a separate window and allows you to easily switch between help and XProtect Professional itself The help system is context sensitive This means that when you press F1 for help while you work in a particular XProtect Professional dialog the help system displays help that ma
284. page 28 In the following we assume that you have not changed the XProtect Professional default configuration path see Configure default file paths on page 212 which is C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Milestone Milestone Surveillance on servers running Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 and C Program Data Milestone Milestone Surveillance on servers running all other supported operating systems If you have changed the default configuration path you must take your changes into consideration when using the method described in the following To back up 1 If XProtect Professional is used on a server running Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 make a copy of the folder C Documents and Settings All Users Application DataMilestone Milestone Surveillance and all of its content If XProtect Professional is used on a server running any other supported operating system make a copy of the folder C Program Data Milestone Milestone Surveillance and all of its content 2 Open the folder C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance Wdevices and verify if the file devices ini exists If the file exists make a copy of it The file will exist if you have configured video properties see General on page 100 for certain types of cameras for such cameras changes to the properties are stored in the file rather than on the camera itself 3 Store the copies away from the XProtect Professional server so that they will not
285. peat for each required output If you later want to remove an output from the one of the lists select the output in question and click the button Motion detection amp exclude regions When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras adjusting motion detection is important because it may determine when video from the camera is recorded when e mail notifications are generated when hardware output such as lights or sirens is activated etc Time spent on finding the best possible motion detection settings for each camera may help you later avoid unnecessary recordings notifications etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc Before you configure motion detection for a camera you should configure the camera s video properties see General on page 100 such as compression resolution etc Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time Therefore we recommended stopping see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when configuring such devices www milestonesys com 110 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Administrator s Manual for motion detection and PTZ See
286. pients 139 140 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Microphone properties 108 Microphones 107 Minimum system requirements 20 MIP plug ins 177 MJPEG 194 Mobile Server 163 Mobile Server Manager 168 Mobile server settings 165 Monitor 194 Monitor storage space usage 189 Motion Detection 58 Motion detection amp exclude regions 51 53 72 77 84 85 92 97 111 146 147 148 150 Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions 72 102 MPEG 194 N Network device type and license 64 66 New hardware device information 62 NTLM 194 O Online period 16 51 53 72 77 88 92 112 135 136 209 Online schedule 50 Output e 96 112 Output control on event Events and Output specific properties 114 125 Overview and names 40 41 42 44 228 Index Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Overview of events and output 36 109 173 Overview of license information 30 31 P Panomorph 194 P frame 194 PIN 195 Ping 195 Polling 195 Port 195 Ports and polling 64 114 116 POS 195 Post recording 195 Pre alarm 195 Pre buffer 195 Pre recording 195 Privacy masking 98 195 PTZ 195 PTZ device 64 67 PTZ on event 105 112 PTZ patrolling 69 103 134 138 PTZ preset positions 101 103 105 PUK 195 R Recording 68 76 81 84 92 119 162 196 Recording and archiving paths 73 93 126 127
287. psulated value are maintained No characters except spaces are allowed outside the quote encapsulated value A double quote inside a quote encapsulated value is interpreted as a single quote Nested quotes quotes inside quotes are not allowed Some examples using semicolon as the separator e camera is interpreted as camera e cam era is interpreted as cam era e camera is interpreted as camera e Sis interpreted as an empty string e cam era is interpreted as cam era where the character is not part of the interpretation but only used to show the start and end of the interpretation e camera is not valid as there are characters outside the quote encapsulated value e cam nested era is not valid as the two quotes are separated with a space and quotes cannot be e cam er a is not valid as you cannot nest quotes e cam era is not valid as there are characters outside the quotes The Configure Video and Recording wizard The Configure Video and Recording wizard helps you quickly configure your cameras video and recording properties Pages in this wizard Video settings and Grevlew emen 56 Online schedule eite cete tcc deterrere tene sn enden EEN 57 Live and recording settings Motion JPEG cameras 58 Live and recording settings MPEG cameras 60 ME Em 63 Recording and archiving settings eeseeeneee 64 Video settings and pre
288. quired Configuration of microphones or speakers in XProtect Professional is very basic Settings such as volume etc are controlled on the microphones or speakers units themselves Show or hide microphone and or speaker If you have added more microphone and or speaker to your XProtect Professional system than you need you can hide the ones you do not need by right clicking the relevant microphone and or speaker and select Hide If you need the hidden microphone again you can right click the overall microphone and or speaker icon and select Show Hidden Items Microphone properties When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras you can determine when audio should be recorded or not Your choice applies for all cameras on your XProtect Professional system Microphone properties Microphones speaker are by default enabled meaning that they are able to transfer audio to XProtect Professional If required you can Enabled disable an individual microphone speaker in which case no audio will be transferred from the microphone speaker to XProtect Professional The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V Microphone speaker name On some hardware devices audio can also be enabled dis
289. r backing up the XProtect Professional database is generally a better option since it flushes the SQL Server s transaction log and gives you the security of being able to restore your XProtect Professional alarm data in case something unexpected happens Export and import management application configuration You can export the current configuration of your XProtect Professional Management Application either as a safety measure in order to have a backup file of your configuration or as a clone allowing you to use a similar Management Application configuration elsewhere You can subsequently import previously exported Management Application configurations Export Management Application configuration as backup With this option all relevant XProtect Professional Management Application configuration files will be combined into one single xml file which can then be saved at a location specified by you Note that if there are unsaved changes to your configuration they will automatically be saved when you export the configuration 1 In the Management Application s File menu select Export Configuration Backup 2 Browse to the location at which you want to store the exported configuration specify a suitable file name and click Save If you intend to set up an identical version of your surveillance system elsewhere do not export your configuration as backup since this may lead to the same device information being used twice in which case
290. r double click the Mobile Server Manager icon a window opens showing the status of the Mobile server You can see the following www milestonesys com 190 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Server running since Time and date of the time when the Mobile server was last started Connected users Number of users currently connected to the Mobile server CPU usage How many 96 of the CPU is currently being used by the Mobile server CPU usage history A graph detailing the history of CPU usage by the Mobile server Access logs and exports The Mobile Server Manager lets you quickly access the log file of the day open the folder to which logs files are saved and open the folder to which exports are saved To open any one of these right click the Mobile Server Manager and select Open Today s Log File Open Log Folder or Open Export Folder respectively Important If you uninstall XProtect Mobile from your system its log files are not deleted Administrators with proper rights can access these log files at a later timer or decide to delete them if they are not needed any longer The default location of the log files is in the ProgramData folder If you change the default location of log files existing logs are not copied to the new location nor are they deleted Edit certificate If you want to use a secure HTTPS protocol to establish connection between your mobile device or the XPro
291. r each camera see Recording on page 105 using MPEG Template www milestonesys com The template can help you configure similar properties quickly Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording path archiving path and retention time for all of them Instead of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times you can simply enter them once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks 96 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Apply Template Camera Name Dual Stream Live FPS Record Keyframe Only Record All Frames on Start Event Stop Event www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V Allows you to check if dual streaming is enabled on the camera s Note that the information is read only For cameras that support dual streaming this can be enabled disabled as part of individual cameras Video on page 101 properties Select the camera s live frame rate per second FPS Keyframes stored a
292. r server will have problems accessing cameras on slave servers However if you have an Event Server installed on the master server and no Event Server installed on slave servers you can create alarms that are triggered when events occur on the slave If you cannot see an event from the slave server when you are creating an alarm and entering the source in the Management Application this could be because you need to be a user on the slave server with administrator access before you can see the events on the slave server A locally defined Windows user created on the Windows server will not be recognized on the slave server and an event from the slave server will not be available for creating alarms If you are a domain user you be added to both the master server and the slave server with administrator access This will allow you to see the events on the slave server and create alarms If you are set up as a basic user on both the master server and slave server with administrator rights on both you will be able to see events on the slave server and create alarms when you log in to the master server with this user ID www milestonesys com 175 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 By default the Management Application will not prompt you for a login but will log you in with the Windows user ID with which you have logged in to Windows If you want to log in to the Management Application as a
293. rames are time stamped by XProtect Professional upon reception and exact date and time information for each image is already known it is recommended that the setting is set to No Tip For consistent time synchronization you may if supported by the camera automatically synchronize camera and system time through a time server Online schedule Specify when each camera should be online An online camera is a camera that transfers video to the XProtect Professional server for live viewing and further processing The fact that a camera is online will not in itself mean that video from the camera is recorded recording settings are configured on one of the wizard s next pages All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited By default cameras added to XProtect Professional will automatically be online Always on and you will only need to modify their online schedules if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events Note however that this default may be changed as part of the scheduling options on page 153 For each camera you are initially able to select between two online schedules e Always on The camera is always online e Always off The camera is never online If these two options are too simple for your needs use the Create Edit button to specify online schedules according to your needs and then select these schedules for your cameras Th
294. ras attached to the hardware device Any character means yes generate a new GUID Required length in seconds of pre recording If specified as for example PreBufferLength1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Required length in seconds of post recording If specified as for example PostBufferLength1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Path to the folder in which a camera s database should be stored If specified as for example RecordingPath1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device 53 Wizards Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 ArchivePath optional number OldRecordingsNewPath optio nal number OldRecordingsNewMac option al number RetentionTime optional number MjpegLiveFrameRate optional number MotionSensitivity optional number MjpegRecordingFrameRate op tional number www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Path to the folder in which the camera s archived see About archiving on page 143 recordings should be stored Remember that an archiving path is only relevant if not using dynamic paths for archiving see Dynamic path selection on page 86 If specified as for example ArchivePath1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Let
295. rate e You want to receive any e mail and or SMS notifications regarding cameras e PTZ cameras should patrol and according to which patrolling profile www milestonesys com 81 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e Archiving should take place See Configure general scheduling and archiving on page 149 and Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 Configure motion detection Do the following 1 In the Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Cameras and Storage Information right click the required camera and select Properties 2 In the Camera Properties window select the Recording Properties tab and select the relevant settings see About motion detection settings on page 78 3 Select the Motion Detection tab If there are any areas that should be excluded from motion detection for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind you can exclude that area see Exclude regions on page 66 by selecting it with your mouse 4 Fill in the relevant properties see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 There are some differences in motion detection behavior for PTZ cameras see About motion detection and PTZ cameras on page 79 5 Click OK Disable or delete cameras All cameras are by default enabled This means that video from the cameras can be transferred to XProtect Profe
296. rd connected to the certificate file 4 When finished click OK Note that HTTPS is not supported on Windows XP and Windows 2003 operating systems and works on Windows Vista or newer Windows OS only Fill in edit surveillance server credentials 1 Right click the Mobile Server Manager and select Surveillance Server Credentials 2 Fillin the Server URL 3 Select what user you want to log in as e Local system administrator no credentials needed or e Aspecified user account credentials needed 1 If you have chosen a specified user account fill in User Name and Password 2 When finished click OK Show edit port numbers 1 Right click the Mobile Server Manager and select Show Edit Port Numbers 2 To edit the port numbers fill in the relevant port number You can indicate a standard port number for HTTP connections and or a secured port number for HTTPS connections 3 When finished click OK Start stop and restart Mobile service If needed you can start stop and restart the Mobile service from the Mobile Server Manager To perform any of these tasks right click the Mobile Server Manager and select Start Mobile service Stop Mobile service or Restart Mobile service respectively Alarms About alarms The Alarms feature is a Milestone Integration Platform MIP see About MIP plug ins on page 199 based feature using functionality handled by the Event server It provides central overview and control of alarms in a
297. rdware device on the surveillance system Recording In XProtect Professional the term recording means saving video and if applicable audio from a camera in the camera s database on the surveillance system server Video audio is often saved only when there is a reason to do so for example as long as motion is detected when an event occurs and until another event occurs or within a certain period of time When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras recording properties include Record whenever the camera is enabled see General on page Always 100 and scheduled to be online see Online period on page 155 the latter allows for time based recording Never record Live video will be displayed but since no video is Never kept in the database users will not be able to play back video from the camera Record when certain conditions are met When you select this option specify required conditions see the following which enables you to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion and or specified events Example If you have defined that video should be stored when a Conditionally door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may also be important Say you have specified that video should be stored conditionally on event with a start event called Door Opened and a stop event called Do
298. re are existing archived recordings at the old location you will be asked whether you want to move the archived recordings to the new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Note that if you move archived recordings XProtect Professional will also archive what is currently in the camera database In case you wonder why the camera database is empty just after you have moved archived recordings this is the reason Total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings from the camera that is recordings in the camera s database as well as any archived recordings Default is 30 days Note that the retention time covers the total amount of time you want to keep recordings for In earlier XProtect Professional versions time limits were specified separately for the database and archives 85 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Click the Open button to configure detailed and or camera specific Camera settings such as event notification PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas for the selected camera Select All Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Clear All Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Set selected template value on Apply only a selected value from the template to selected cameras selected cameras Tip To select more than one value press CTRL while selecting Set all template value
299. red Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template column Apply only a selected value from the template to selected cameras Tip To select more than one value press CTRL while selecting Create a new schedule profile of any type by clicking the Create button When you configure general scheduling and archiving see Configure general scheduling and archiving on page 149 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go In the case of Scheduling Options it is because the properties are shared by all cameras Start cameras on client requests www milestonesys com Cameras may be offline for example because they have reached the end of an online recording schedule see Online period on page 155 in which case client users will not be able to view live video from the cameras However if you select Start cameras on client requests client users will be able to view live video from the camera outside online schedule but without recording technically force the camera to be online outside its online schedule You must select Enable recording when started on client request see the following if you want recording to take place 153 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Enable recording when started on client request Schedule profile for new cameras Maximum delay between reconnect attempts Administr
300. regular intervals is called polling The interval between state checks called a polling frequency is specified as part of the general ports amp polling properties see Ports and polling on page 133 For such I O hardware devices the polling frequency should be set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which I O hardware devices require polling see the release notes www milestonesys com 73 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Administrator s Manual Configure hardware devices Once you have added hardware devices see The Add Hardware Devices wizard on page 44 you can specify edit device specific properties such as the IP address which video channels to use which COM ports to use for controlling attached PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras whether to use 360 lens technology etc 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Hardware Devices right click the required hardware device and select Properties Specify Name amp Video channels Network Device type and license see Network device type and license on page 75 PTZ device on page 76 and 360 Lens see Fisheye on page 113 properties as required Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Delete hardware devices IMPORTANT If you delete a hardware device you
301. replace a physical camera on your network www milestonesys com 74 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e Open the Replace Hardware Device wizard see About the Replace Hardware Device wizard on page 71 which helps you through the entire replacement process on the surveillance System server including o Detecting the new hardware device o Specifying license for the new hardware device o Deciding what to do with existing recordings from the old hardware device Hardware properties Properties in this window Hardware name and video channels sse 75 Network device type and license sssssssssssssrnsnssesssrnnnsnssrenrnnnenssrene 75 E LEI ed Seege Segel eebe 76 Hardware name and video channels When you configure hardware devices on page 74 specify the following properties The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as in clients You can overwrite the existing name with a new one Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V Hardware name Enable disable each of the selected hardware device s video channels Many hardware devices only have a single video Video channel enabled channel in which case only one channel will be listed Other hardware devices typically video encoder devices have several video channels If some of the channels are unavailable this is because you are
302. reset positions this way and preset positions have since then been added or changed on the camera you can use this button to refresh the imported preset positions Only available when you have selected PTZ type 1 When you have move the camera to a required position using the controls in the upper half of the window type a name for the position in the blank field then click the button to add the position to the list of defined preset positions Remember that names of preset positions must contain only the characters A Z a z and the digits 0 9 Only available when you have selected PTZ type 1 or 3 Lets you change an already defined preset position In the list select the preset position you want to change Then move the camera to the new required position using the controls in the upper half of the window Then click the button to overwrite the old position with the new one 116 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Only available when you have selected PTZ type 1 or 3 Lets you delete an already defined preset In the list select the preset position you want to delete then click the button Before you delete a preset position make sure it is not used in PTZ patrolling or PTZ on event Since the preset positions are stored on Delete the camera you can bring a deleted preset position back into XProtect Professional by clicking the Import refresh button If you bring back a pres
303. rix triggered video can appear on a Matrix recipient e Manual triggering Another user wants to share important video and sends it from a Smart Client or from a custom made web page to the required Matrix recipient e Automatic triggering Video is sent to the required Matrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened or when the surveillance system detects motion in the video from a camera Configure Matrix 1 In the Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Matrix and select Properties 2 Enable the use of Matrix by selecting the Enable Matrix check box 3 Specify required properties see Matrix recipients on page 158 or for automatically triggered video sharing select Matrix Event Control and configure Matrix Event Control properties see Matrix event control on page 160 When ready click OK 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Configure Matrix for video sharing 1 In the Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Matrix and select Properties 2 Enable the use of Matrix by selecting the Enable Matrix check box 3 Specify required properties see Matrix recipients on page 158 or for automatically triggered video sharing select Matrix Event Control and configure Matrix Even
304. rk device type and license properties after you have imported the other changes through the CSV file Name of the hardware device Name must unique and must not contain any of the following special characters lt gt amp V If cameras and server are offline specify a HardwareDriverlD for each hardware device you want to add Example ACTi ACD 2100 105 indicates that you should use 105 as the ID if adding an ACTi ACD 2100 hardware device Name of the camera Must appear as CameraNamet CameraName2 etc in the header line since a hardware device can potentially have more than one camera attached Names must be unique and must not contain any of the following special characters lt gt amp V Number for keyboard shortcut access to the camera in the Smart Client Must appear as CameraShortcut1 CameraShortcut2 etc in the header line since a hardware device can potentially have more than one camera attached A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must not be longer than eight digits Lets you specify whether to generate a new GUID for a camera this is especially relevant if using a cloned configuration see Export and import management application configuration on page 204 as your template since all GUIDs are removed from cloned configurations If specified as for example GenerateNewCameraGuid1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all came
305. rms on the event server Specify the number of days for which to keep the Alarms log Default is 30 days The value of 0 will indicate keep log indefinitely server space permitting Specify if you want to save a separate log of server communication in addition to the regular log for the number of days specified 43 Application settings Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Wizards Administrator s Manual The Add Hardware Devices wizard You add cameras and other hardware devices such as video encoders to your XProtect Professional system through the Add Hardware Devices wizard If microphones or speakers are attached to a hardware device they are automatically added as well You can use up to 64 cameras per XProtect Professional server Note that if required it is possible to add more cameras than you are allowed to use If you use video encoder devices on your system bear in mind that many video encoder devices have more than one camera connected to them For example a fully used four port video encoder will count as four cameras The wizard offers you four different ways of adding cameras Express recommended Advanced Manual Import from CSV file www milestonesys com Scans your network for relevant hardware devices and helps you quickly add them to your system To use the Express method your XProtect Professional server and your cameras must be on the same layer 2 network that is a network wh
306. rom the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode The speedup feature lets you use a higher than normal frame rate if motion is detected and or an event occurs When you enable speedup further columns for specifying speedup details become available Speedup frame rate for viewing video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode Required average frame rate for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when motion is detected The camera will return to the normal frame rates two seconds after the last motion is detected 90 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s M
307. rotect Professional as well as for archiving Path to the folder in which the camera s database should be stored Default is CAMediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can only specify a path to a folder on a local drive You cannot specify a path to a network drive If you use a network drive it is not be possible to save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable Recording Path If you change the recording path and you have existing recordings at the old location you are asked whether you want to move the recordings to the new location recommended leave them at the old location or delete them Tip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available you can improve performance by distributing individual cameras databases across several drives www milestonesys com 63 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Only editable if not using dynamic paths for archiving see About archiving on page 143 Path to the folder in which the camera s archived recordings should be stored Default is C MediaDatabase To browse for another folder click the browse icon next to the required cell You can specify a path to a local or network drive If A you change the archiving path and there are existing archived Archiving Path recordings at the old location you will be asked whether you want to move the archived recordings to the
308. rt live and recorded video We recommend that you always use the latest version of the Smart Client to best use any possible new features and functions included in your XProtect Professional surveillance system A free application designed by Milestone that allows you to view video from your XProtect Professional surveillance system from almost anywhere on your smartphone or tablet You can also control outputs such as opening and closing doors and switching lights on or off allowing you to gain control and dynamically respond to incidents in the system XProtect Mobile client A simplified web based client application for XProtect surveillance systems for viewing playing back and sharing video from most XProtect Web Client operating systems and web browsers With no need to install additional software you can monitor your XProtect system from any Internet enabled computer or device www milestonesys com 12 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Clients Clients are applications used for viewing live and recorded video from the hardware devices set up in the Management Application XProtect Smart Client About XProtect Smart Client The XProtect Smart Client has many features and prepares for future integration of plugins etc The Smart Client must be installed on users computers Surveillance system administrators manage clients access to the surveillance system through the Manageme
309. rties 65 Host 193 Hotspot 193 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual HTTP 193 I 1 0 193 If the camera uses the MJPEG video format 78 If the camera uses the MPEG video format 80 frame 193 Image Server 193 Import changes to configuration 183 Import from CSV file 26 39 45 Important port numbers 21 Improve stability with 3 GB virtual memory 185 Info 165 Information driver selection and verification e 44 Install and upgrade 23 Install from a DVD 12 13 Install from the surveillance server 12 Install silently e 14 24 Install the XProtect Smart Client 12 Install XProtect Mobile client 15 Install your surveillance server software 23 27 155 180 Introduction 10 IP 193 IP address 193 IP ranges drivers and authentication 42 227 Index Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 IPIX 193 J JPEG 194 K Keyframe 194 L Language support and XML encoding 152 153 Licenses 30 Live and recording settings Motion JPEG cameras 50 Live and recording settings MPEG cameras 52 Local IP ranges 152 153 Log properties 144 Logs 142 M MAC address 194 Manual 39 43 Manual event 120 Manual events 194 Manual recording 81 93 161 Master Slave 154 194 Master slave properties 155 Matrix 138 194 Matrix event control 139 141 Matrix properties 140 Matrix recipient 194 Matrix reci
310. rties These properties will determine the rights of the user 5 Click OK 6 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Users who have been added from a local database logging in with a client should not specify any server name PC name or IP address as part of the user name Example of a correctly specified user name USERO01 Example of an incorrectly specified user name PC001 USERO001 The user should of course still specify a password and any required server information Add user groups User groups are logical groups created and used for practical purposes in the Management Application only They are not in any way connected with user groups from central directory services such as for example Active Directory By grouping users you can specify rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 for all users within a group in one go If you have many users performing similar tasks this can save you significant amounts of work Make sure you add groups before you add users You cannot add existing users to groups www milestonesys com 178 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Users and select Add New User Group Specify a name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters ez
311. rties in this window User gute tel EE 180 Group information ener 180 General EE 180 Camera EE 181 Alarm Access Propertes 182 www milestonesys com 179 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 User information User name Password User type Group information Group name General access Administrator s Manual Only editable if the selected user is of the type basic user Edit the user name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp Only editable if the selected user is of the type basic user Edit the password Remember to repeat the password to be sure you have specified it correctly Non editable field displaying whether the selected user is of the type basic user or Windows user group Edit the group name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp V 21 When you add or edit basic users see Add basic users on page 177 Windows users see Add Windows users on page 177 or groups see Add user groups on page 178 specify general access settings Live Playback Setup Edit shared views www milestonesys com Ability to access the Live tab in the Smart Client Ability to access the Playback tab in the Smart Client Ability to access setup mode in the Smart Client Tip By clearing the Live Playback and Setup check boxes you can effectively disable
312. rver click Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services www milestonesys com 201 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 2 Right click the Event Server click Stop This is important since any changes made to alarm configurations between the time you create a backup and the time you restore it will be lost If changes are made after the backup you will have to make a new backup Note that alarms will not be generated while the Event Server service is stopped it is thus important to remember to start the service again once you have finished backing up the SQL database Step 2 Backing up alarms data in SQL Server Express database 1 6 7 Open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express from Windows Start menu by selecting All Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server 2008 gt SQL Server Management Studio Express Tip If you do not have SQL Server Management Studio Express it can be downloaded for free from www microsoft com downloads see http www microsoft com downloads http www microsoft com downloads When you open the tool you are prompted to connect to a server Specify the name of the required SQL Server and connect with admin user credentials Tip You do not have to type the name of the SQL server If you click inside the Server name field and select Browse for more gt you can select the required SQL Server from a li
313. s recordings In the above example Camera 1 s archiving to D may result in no recording space for camera 2 on D The rule is Do not cross recording and archiving drives If you use several surveillance servers in a master slave setup each surveillance server must archive to its own mapped location in order for archiving to work If you attempt to archive to the same mapped location for all the servers archiving will fail If you use several surveillance servers in a master slave setup each surveillance server must archive to its own mapped location in order for archiving to work If you attempt to archive to the same mapped location for all the servers archiving will fail About archiving audio If an audio source for example a microphone is enabled on a hardware device audio recordings are archived together with video recordings from the camera attached to the hardware device If the hardware device is a video encoder with several channels audio is archived with the camera on channel 1 When an audio source is enabled audio is recorded to the associated camera s database This will affect the database s capacity for storing video You may therefore want to use scheduled archiving more frequently if recording audio and video than if only recording video Storage capacity required for archiving The storage capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan to keep and on how long you want to
314. s clients also use a Japanese version of Windows this will ensure that the correct language and character encoding is used in clients communication with the server Master Slave About master and slave You can create a master slave setup of XProtect Professional servers A master slave setup will allow remote users to transparently connect to more than one server at the same time When remote users connect to the master server they will instantly get access to the slave servers as well Configure master and slave servers Configuring a master slave setup In the Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Master Slave and select Properties 1 Select the Enable as master server check box 2 Click Add to add a slave server 3 Specify slave server properties When ready click OK 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Adding a slave server To add a slave server expand Advanced Configuration in the Management Application right click Master Slave and select Add New Slave Server then specify slave server properties Slave servers can also be added from the Master Slave Properties window by clicking Add Tip Instead of specifying a host name when adding a slave server you may specify the IP address of the slave server Simply type the IP address in the Address field when adding the slave server Remember tha
315. s default setting with only 2 GB virtual memory reserved for running processes the Recording Server service in very large installations of XProtect Professional may e Behave erratically when it gets close to the 2 GB virtual memory limit Symptoms can include database corruption and client server or camera server communication errors e Become unstable and crash if it exceeds the 2 GB virtual memory limit During such crashes the code managing the surveillance system databases is not closed properly and databases will become corrupt In case of a crash Windows will normally restart the Recording Server service However when the Recording Server service is restarted one of its first tasks will be to repair the databases The database repair process can in some cases take several hours depending on the amount of data in the corrupted databases If you experience problems and you run XProtect Professional 6 5 or newer making Windows use 3 GB for running processes is likely to solve the problems If you have not experienced problems but you run XProtect Professional 6 5 or newer and your XProtect Professional installation is very large and or features many megapixel cameras 3 GB switching can help prevent the problems from occurring The way to configure 32 bit Windows to be LARGEADDRESSAWARE depends on your type of Windows operating system In the following you will see two methods outlining Microsoft s recommended procedure for increasing
316. s on Selected camaras Apply all values from the template to selected cameras Dynamic path selection When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go In the case of Dynamic Path Selection itis because the properties are shared by all cameras With dynamic archiving see About archiving on page 143 paths you specify a number of different archiving paths usually across several drives If the path containing the XProtect Professional database is on one of the drives you have selected for archiving XProtect Professional will always try to archive to that drive first If not XProtect Professional automatically archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at any time provided there is not a camera database using that drive Which drive has the most available space may change during the archiving process and archiving may therefore happen to several archiving drives during the same process This fact will have no impact on how users find and view archived recordings Dynamic archiving paths are general for all your cameras you cannot configure dynamic archiving paths for individual cameras All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Enables the use of dynamic path selection allowing you to select Enable dynamic path which paths you want to use The
317. s you specify what to do with old recordings in case RecordingPath or ArchivePath have been changed If this parameter is not specified default behavior is Leave see the following If specified as for example OldRecordingsNewPath1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Valid options are Delete deletes old recordings Leave leaves old recordings for offline investigation but unavailable for online system or Move moves old recordings to archive Lets you specify what to do with old recordings in case a new MAC address has been specified for the hardware device If this parameter is not specified default behavior is Leave see the following If specified as for example OldrecordingsNewMac1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Valid options are Delete deletes old recordings Leave leaves old recordings for offline investigation but unavailable for online system or Inherit renames all old recording folders according to the new MAC address thus making them available for the online system Required retention time in minutes Remember that retention time is the total of recording time plus archiving time If specified as for example RetentionTime1 information relates to a specific camera otherwise to all cameras attached to the hardware device Required MJPEG live frame rate in number of frames dep
318. se automatic SMS notifications will be sent in such cases regardless of any scheduled SMS notification periods see SMS notification on page 156 169 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Central About XProtect Central The XProtect Central Settings lets you specify the login settings required for an XProtect Central server to access the surveillance system in order to retrieve status information and alarms If you are a user of the Milestone Integration Platform this is also the dialog that lets you specify the login settings for the Milestone Integration Platform to access the surveillance system Enable XProtect Central 1 In the Management Application s Navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Central and then select Properties 2 Enable the use of Central connections by selecting the Enable MilestoneXProtect Central check box 3 Specify required properties see Central properties on page 170 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Central properties Enable Milestone XProtect Enables the use of Central connections allowing you to specify Central connections further properties Type the name used for the connection between the XProtect Professional and XProtect Central servers or the Milestone Integration Platform The name must match the name specified on the XProtec
319. se button drag the mouse pointer and release at the required end point o You specify each day separately o You specify time in increments of five minutes XProtect Professional helps you by showing the time over which your mouse pointer is positioned If you base your schedule profile or parts of it on events within periods of time remember to select Start event and Stop event from the lists below the calendar section o Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields o To delete an unwanted part of a schedule profile right click it and select Delete o To quickly fill or clear an entire day double click the name of the day o Asan alternative to dragging inside the calendar section use the Start time End time and Day fields then the Change Period or Set Period button as required When using the Start time and End time fields remember that time is specified in increments of five minutes You cannot specify a period shorter than five minutes and you can only use times like 12 00 12 05 12 10 12 15 etc If you specify a time outside of the five minute intervals such as 12 13 you will get an error message Configure when cameras should do what Use the scheduling feature to configure when e Cameras should be online that is transfer video to XProtect Professional e Cameras should use speedup that is use a higher than normal frame
320. se your schedule profile or parts of it on events within periods of time remember to select Start event and Stop event from the lists below the calendar section Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields The fact that a camera transfers video to XProtect Professional does not necessarily mean that video from the camera is recorded Recording is configured separately see Configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 For each camera you can create schedule profiles based on Online periods e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in pink e Events within periods of time example from Event A occurs until Event B occurs Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in yellow Cu ses The two options can be combined zx but they cannot overlap in time Speedup e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in olive green E mail notification e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in blue ep ss SMS notification e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in green rep iss PTZ patrolling e Periods of time example Mondays from 08 30 until 17 45 shown in red www milestonesys com 150 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e f use of one p
321. select the Day View Week View or Month View tab then right click inside the calendar and select either Add Single Time or Add Recurring Time 3 If you select Add Single Time specify Start time and End time If the time is to cover whole days select the All day event box www milestonesys com 194 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Oor If you select Add Recurring Time specify time range recurrence pattern and range of recurrence Tip If you select a time period by dragging in the calendar before right clicking the selected period will automatically be used in the dialog that appears when you select Add Single Time or Add Recurring Time 4 Click OK 5 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Tip When you edit an existing time profile remember that a time profile may contain more than one time period and that time periods may be recurring If you want your time profile to contain additional periods of time add more single times or recurring times Add an alarm For a detailed overview of Alarms and how the feature works see About alarms on page 192 To add configure an alarm do the following 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Alarms right click Alarm Definition and select Create New 2 Specify required properties see Alarms definition on pag
322. simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time Therefore we www milestonesys com 213 Common tasks Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 recommended stopping see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when configuring such devices for motion detection and PTZ See also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 www milestonesys com 214 Common tasks Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Glossary of terms Administrator s Manual Symbols amp Numeric 360 degrees panomorph support Cameras with 360 degrees panomorph support offer as the name indicates 360 degree coverage and can survey an entire area without blind spots or distorted images A Administrator 1 System administrator 2 In previous versions of XProtect Professional the main application used by XProtect Professional administrators for configuring the surveillance system server Now called the Management Application Analytics Events Analytics events are typically data received from an external third party video content analysis VCA provider An example of a VCA based system is an access control system Analytics events can be integrated seamlessly with the Alarms feature API Application Program Interface set of tools and building blocks for creating or customizing software applications
323. ssional provided that the cameras are scheduled to be online see Online period on page 155 To disable a camera 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Cameras and Storage Information double click the camera you want to disable and clear the Enabled box 2 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar To delete a camera you have to delete the hardware device see Delete hardware devices on page 74 If you delete the hardware device you also delete any attached microphones and speakers If you do not want this consider disabling the camera instead www milestonesys com 82 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions For PTZ types 1 and 3 you can move the PTZ camera to required positions in several different ways 1 Click the required position in the camera preview if supported by the camera 2 Usethe sliders located near the camera preview to move the PTZ camera along each of its axes the X axis for panning left right the Y axis for tilting up down and the Z axis for zooming in and out to zoom in move the slider towards Tele to zoom out move the slider towards Wide 3 Usethe navigation buttons Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up O Moves the PTZ camera up and
324. st instead Once connected you will see a tree structure in the Object Explorer in the left part of the window Expand the SQL Server item then the Databases item which contains your entire alarm configuration Right click the VIDEOOSDB database and select Tasks Back Up On the Back Up Database dialog s General page do the following o Under Source Verify that the selected database is VIDEOOSDB and that the backup type is Full o Under Destination A destination path for the backup is automatically suggested Verify that the path is satisfactory If not remove the suggested path and add another path of your choice On the Back Up Database dialog s Options page under Reliability select Verify backup when finished and Perform checksum before writing to media Click OK to begin the backup When backup is finished you will see a confirmation Exit Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express No VIDEOOSDB database VIDEOOSDB is the default name of the database containing the system configuration If you can find the database but it is not called VIDEOOSDB it could be because you gave the database another name during the installation In the following we will assume that the database uses the default name www milestonesys com 202 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Step 3 Reinstalling XProtect Professional if needed see Install your surveillance s
325. st appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one that is so they will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message expression field Tip It is OK for TCP and UDP packages used for generic events to contain special characters such as etc within the text string to be analyzed 139 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Displays the string which will be used for the actual package analysis The field is not directly editable However you can position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where a new item should be included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons described in the following Likewise you can position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button e Lets you add a start parenthesis character to the Event message expression field Parentheses can be used to ensure that related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example If using User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday the two terms inside the parenthesis will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of t
326. started you cannot view or record video Restarting services typically only takes a few seconds but in order to minimize disruption you may want to restart services at a time when you do not expect important incidents Users connected to XProtect Professional through clients will typically remain logged in during the services restart but they will experience a short video outage Configure default file paths XProtect Professional uses a number of default file paths Default recording path for new cameras All new cameras you add will by default use this path for storing recordings If required you can change individual cameras recording paths as part of their individual configuration see Recording and archiving paths on page 106 but you can also change the default recording path so all new cameras you add will use a path of your choice All new cameras you add will by default use this path for archiving see About archiving on page 143 If required you can change individual cameras archiving paths as part of their individual Default archiving path for new configuration but you can also change the default recording path so cameras all new cameras you add will use a path of your choice Note that Configuration path camera specific archiving paths are not relevant if using dynamic path selection on page 86 for archiving The path by default used for storing your XProtect Professional system configuration To change an
327. stopped the button changes to Start allowing you to start the service again when required Tip Occasionally you may want to stop a service and start it again immediately after The Restart button allows you to do just that with a single click Servers Mobile Server About Mobile server A Mobile server handles log ins when a user wants to log into his her XProtect video management setup via the XProtect Mobile client see About XProtect Mobile client on page 16 from a mobile device or from XProtect Web Client see About XProtect Web Client on page 17 Upon correct login the Mobile server distributes video streams from relevant recording servers to XProtect Mobile client This offers an extremely secure setup where recording servers are never connected to the Internet When a Mobile server receives video streams from recording servers it also handles the complex conversion of codecs and formats allowing streaming of video on the mobile device Important Before you begin the installation of the Mobile server make sure you are logged in with an account that has administrator rights Installation will not be successful if you use a standard user account About Video push Video push is feature in your Mobile client that allows you to use your mobile device s camera for example to collect evidence when you investigate an alarm or event You do this by sending a video stream from your mobile device to your XProtect video management
328. strator s Manual Used for FTP traffic FTP File Transfer Protocol is a standard for exchanging files across networks FTP uses the TCP IP standards for data transfer and is often used for uploading or downloading files to and from servers Used for SMTP traffic SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers This port should be open since depending on configuration some cameras may send images to the surveillance system server via e mail Used for HTTP traffic between the surveillance server cameras and Smart Client and the default communication port for the surveillance system s Image Server service Used for RSTP traffic in connection with H 264 video streaming Used for HTTP traffic between cameras and the surveillance server Used for event handling Used for communication with the XProtect Central add on product if used by your organization Used for communication with the Event Server service Your organization may also have selected to use any other port numbers for example if you have changed the server access on page 172 port from its default port number 80 to another port number Virus scanning information Virus scanning uses a considerable amount of system resources on scanning all the data which is being archived or used by the Download Manager The scanning process may temporarily lock each file it scans which can further impact system performance neg
329. t Enter a description optional Test the validity of the event by clicking this button optional Tip You can carry out this test at any step of the analytics event creation editing process and as many times as you wish When you click Test Event a window opens which goes through a number of conditions that must be met for analytics events to work The window consists of two tabs Tasks and Errors The Tasks tab lists the conditions that are tested and mark them failed Lor Success Ld The Errors tab shows a list of errors corresponding to any failed conditions Remember to save any changes made during the test When done check the presence of your test event in the Smart Client s Alarm list Sort by type Test Alarm to make your test event appear at the top of the Alarm list See the Smart Client documentation for more details Changes saved Analytics Events enabled Address allowed Analytics event used in alarm definition Send analytics event If the event is new is it saved Or if Save changes before testing there are changes to the event name analytics event Solution Explanation are these changes saved Save changes Analytics events have not been enabled Solution Explanation Enable the Analytics Events feature The local host name must be added as allowed address for the Analytics Event service Solution Explanation Add your machine to the analytics events address list of allowed IP addresses host n
330. t occurs Attach image from camera www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between 0 lowest priority and 1000 highest priority When XProtect Professional receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered If a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority for example two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered Select which protocol XProtect Professional should listen for in order to detect the event e Any Listen for and analyze packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol e TCP Listen for and analyze packages using TCP protocol only e UDP Listen for and analyze packages using UDP protocol only Select how particular XProtect Professional should be when analyzing received data packages e Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event message expression field but may also have more content Example If you have sp
331. t Central server or in the Milestone Integration Platform Login Name Type the password used for the connection between XProtect Professional and XProtect Central servers or the Milestone Password Integration Platform The password must match the password specified on the XProtect Central server or in the Milestone Integration Platform Type the port number to which the XProtect Central server or the Milestone Integration Platform should connect when accessing the Port XProtect Professional server The port number must match the port number specified on the XProtect Central server or in the Milestone Integration Platform Default port is 1237 www milestonesys com 170 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Server access About server access You can configure clients access to the XProtect Professional server in two ways e Wizard driven Guided configuration which lets you specify how clients access the server and which users can use clients See Configure User Access wizard on page 68 When you use the wizard all users that you add have access to all cameras including new cameras added at a later stage If this is not acceptable specify access settings users and user rights separately see the following e Through advanced configuration In previous versions of XProtect Professional this was known as Image Server administration since technically it is the Image Server service
332. t Control properties see Matrix event control on page 160 When ready click OK 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Matrix properties Properties in this window MANX ee E EE Matrix event Control Matrix recipients The Matrix Recipients tab is used for enabling Matrix functionality and for defining on which computers to display Matrix triggered live video A computer on which Matrix triggered video can be displayed is known as a Matrix recipient Being able to view Matrix triggered video requires that a Smart Client is installed on the user s computer www milestonesys com 158 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Enable Matrix List of Defined Matrix recipients Delete Name Address Port Password Matrix recipient is a Smart Client Clear Update Add www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Select check box to enable Matrix functionality Lists any already defined Matrix recipients that is computers on which Matrix triggered video can be displayed To change the properties of an already defined Matrix recipient select the required Matrix recipient make the changes in the fields below the list then click the Update button To remove a Matrix recipient from the list select the unwanted Matrix recipient then click the Delete button Available only when you have selected a Matri
333. t if on a local network the local IP address of the slave server must be used Before you start using your master slave setup remember to verify that e Required users have be defined on the master server as well as on each of the slave servers www milestonesys com 174 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e Public Access see Configure server access on page 171 has been enabled on all involved servers and ports mapped accordingly in the routers or firewalls used if the slave servers are to be accessed from the internet When using a master slave setup remote users and their rights must be defined in the Management Application s Users section on the master server as well as on each of the slave servers Only cameras to which a remote user has been given access will be visible to the user regardless of whether the cameras are connected to the master server or to one of the slave servers If they are to be accessed from the internet Public Access must be enabled on all involved servers and ports must be mapped accordingly in the routers and or firewalls used Frequently asked questions about using master slave How many master servers can I use in a master slave setup An unlimited number of servers per SLC Software License Code specified during installation see Install your surveillance server software on page 26 can be designated as master servers If required for exa
334. t ports for different types of data traffic Therefore it is sometimes but not always necessary to specify which port to use for particular data communication Most ports are used automatically based on the types of data included in the communication On TCP IP networks port numbers range from 0 to 65536 but only ports 0 to 1024 are reserved for particular purposes For example port 80 is used for HTTP traffic which is used when viewing web pages POS Also PoS Point of sale the physical place where a sale is made for example at the cash register Post recording The ability to store recordings from periods following motion and or specified events Based on incoming video being buffered on the XProtect Professional server in case it is going to be needed for a motion or event triggered recording Using post recording can 219 Glossary of terms Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 be highly advantageous if for example you have defined that video should be recorded while a gate is open being able to see what happens immediately after the gate is closed may also be important Pre alarm Pre alarm images is a feature available for selected cameras only it enables the sending of images from immediately before an event took place from the camera to XProtect Professional via e mail Pre buffer See the description of Pre recording Pre recording The ability to store recordings from periods preceding dete
335. t specified intervals record the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames record only pixels that change this helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files Select the check box if you only want to record keyframes Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record keyframes only e Motion Detection Select this to record all frames when motion is detected Two seconds after the last motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected the camera will return to recording keyframes only e Event Select this to record all frames when an event occurs and until another event occurs Requires that events have been defined and that you select start and stop events in the neighboring columns Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable events you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list located below the other fields e Motion Detection amp Event Select this to record all frames when motion is detected or when an event occurs and until another event occurs Remember to select start and stop events in the neighboring columns e Schedule only Select this to record all frames according to the camera s speedup schedule see Speedup on page 156 only Use when recording on Event or Motion Detection amp Event Select required start event The camera will begin recording all frames when the start event occurs Select required stop event The camera will again only recording
336. t you want to include the hardware device in the scan To begin with leave the box cleared Provided XProtect Use Professional can find a suitable driver for the hardware device the Use box will automatically be selected later Address IP address or host name of the hardware device Port number on which to scan The default is port 80 If a hardware device is located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall you Port may need to specify a different port number When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the port and IP address used by the hardware device User name for the hardware device s administrator account Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer s default user names for their hardware devices If that is the case in your organization select default do not type a manufacturer s default user name as this can be a source of error trust that XProtect User name Professional will know the manufacturer s default user name Other typical user names such as admin or root are also selectable from the list If you want a user name which is not on the list simply type a new user name Tip User names you enter will subsequently be added to the list so you can easily select them later Password required to access the administrator account A few hardware devices do not require user name password for access if such hardware devices are used in your organization you can leave the
337. tches that dialog Navigating the built in help system To navigate between the contents of the help system use the help window s tabs Contents Search and Favorites or use the links inside the help topics e Contents Tab Navigate the help system based on a tree structure Many users are familiar with this type of navigation from for example Windows Explorer e Search Tab Search for help topics that contain particular terms of interest For example you can search for the term zoom and every help topic that contains the term zoom is listed in the search results When you double click a help topic title in the search results list the required topic opens e Favorites Tab Build a list of your favorite help topics Whenever you find a help topic of particular interest to you add the topic to your favorites list You can then access the topic with a single click also if you close the help window and return to it later Help topics contain various types of links notably so called expanding drop down links When you click such a link detailed information is displayed immediately below the link itself and the content of the topic expands Expanding drop down links help save space Tip To quickly hide all texts from expanding drop down links in a help topic click the title of the topic on the help system s Contents tab Printing help topics To print a help topic navigate to the required topic and click the help window s Print butt
338. te 82 bit or 64 bit Intel Core2 Duo minimum 2 4 GHz or higher more powerful CPU CPU recommended for Smart Clients running high number of cameras and multiple views and displays Minimum 1 GB higher RAM recommended for Smart Clients RAM running high number of cameras and multiple views and displays Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 Graphics adapter recommended 16 bit colors Hard disk space Minimum 1 GB free hard disk space available e Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework Software e DirectX 9 0 or newer Administrator rights When you install XProtect Professional it is important that you have administrator rights on the computer that should run XProtect Professional If you only have standard user rights you cannot configure the surveillance system Important port numbers XProtect Professional uses particular ports when communicating with other computers cameras etc Make sure that the following ports are open for data traffic on your network when you use XProtect Professional www milestonesys com 23 Before you start Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Port 20 and 21 inbound and outbound Port 25 inbound and outbound Port 80 inbound and outbound Port 554 inbound and outbound Port 1024 outbound only Port 1234 inbound and outbound Port 1237 inbound and outbound Port 22331 inbound and outbound Admini
339. te any of your information click the link provided at the bottom to log on to the Milestone website from which you can update your information Apply save configuration changes Whenever you make changes in your XProtect Professional configuration you will be asked to apply them e f you made the changes in one of the Management Application dialogs you apply them by clicking OK www milestonesys com 211 Common tasks Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 If you made the changes in one of the Management Application summary tables click Apply Applying a configuration change means that the change is stored by XProtect Professional in a restore point see Restore system configuration from a restore point on page 206 so that you can return to a working configuration if something goes wrong but applying a configuration change does not mean that the changes will take immediate effect on the surveillance system To store your configuration change in the configuration file 1 2 In the Management Application toolbar click the Save Configuration button For your configuration changes to have immediate effect on the Management Application toolbar click Save Changes and Restart Surveillance Services If you do not restart immediately your configuration changes will take effect the next time you restart XProtect Professional services see About services on page 183 IMPORTANT While services are re
340. tect Web Client and the Mobile server you must have a valid certificate for the device or web browser to accept it without warning The certificate confirms that the certificate holder is authorized to establish the connection When you install the Mobile server you generate a self signed certificate if you run a Typical installation If you run a Custom installation you get the choice between generating a self signed certificate or loading a file containing a certificate issued by another trusted site If you at a later point want change the certificate you use you can do this from the Mobile Server Manager 1 Right click the Mobile Server Manager and select Edit Certificate 2 Choose whether you want to either e Generate a self signed certificate or e Load a certificate file Generate a self signed certificate 1 Choose the Generate a self signed certificate option and click OK 2 Wait for a few seconds while the system installs the certificate 3 Once finished a window opens and informs you that the certificate was installed successfully The Mobile service is restarted for the changes to take effect www milestonesys com 191 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Locate a certificate file 1 Choose the Load a certificate file option 2 Fillin the path for the certificate file or click the box to open a window where you can browse for the file 3 Fill in the passwo
341. tem Channel column Shows the channel number for the relevant channel Non editable Port Port number for the relevant Video push channel MAC MAC address for the relevant Video push channel User Name Enter the user name associated with the relevant channel Camera Name Shows the name of the camera if the cameras has been identified Once you have completed all necessary steps see Add a Video push channel on page 186 click Find Cameras to search for the relevant camera Note that every time you change a setting in the Mobile server settings you must click the Apply button followed by the Save button Export Specify the settings for exported recordings Export Enable export in clients Export to Specify the location to which recordings should be exported Delete exported recordings older than Enter the number of days to pass before recordings are deleted Enter a number to set a maximum limit for the folder to which the Limit size of exports folder to recordings are exported Include timestamps Add timestamps to exported video In the columns see the following details for every individual exported recording Name column Name of the exported recording www milestonesys com 189 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 State column State of the exported recording Camera column The camera that provided the exported recording Timestamp column The point of time whe
342. th columns as required Tip If you have not yet defined any suitable event or output you can quickly do it Use the Configure events list and or Configure Output button located below the list of associations Configure general event handling Before configuring events of any type configure general event handling such as which ports XProtect Professional should use for event data Normally you can just use the default values but it is a good idea to verify that your organization is not already using the ports for other purposes 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Events and Output and select Properties www milestonesys com 130 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 2 Specify required properties see Ports and polling on page 133 XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar Test a generic event If you have added a generic event a quick and easy way to test your generic event is to first set up an event notif
343. the cameras that could not be inherited by the new hardware devices will not be deleted Even though the old databases still exist on the XProtect Professional server it will not be possible to view recordings from before the hardware replacement Should you later want to delete the old databases deletion must take place manually New databases will of course be created for future recordings by the new hardware devices 4 Click Finish When ready restart see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service The hardware replacement will not be evident in clients until you restart the Recording Server service About dedicated input output devices You can add a number of dedicated input output I O hardware devices to XProtect Professional see Add hardware devices see The Add Hardware Devices wizard on page 44 For information about which I O hardware devices are supported see the release notes When you add I O hardware devices input on them can be used for generating events in XProtect Professional and events in XProtect Professional can be used for activating output on the I O hardware devices This means that you can use I O hardware devices in your events based system setup in the same way as a camera With certain I O hardware devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the hardware devices input ports to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at
344. the database becomes corrupted e Repair scan delete if fails Default action If the database becomes corrupted two different repair methods will be attempted a fast repair and a thorough repair If both repair methods fail the contents of the database will be deleted e Repair delete if fails If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be deleted e Repair archive if fails If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be archived e Delete no repair If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be deleted e Archive no repair If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be archived If you choose an action to repair a corrupt database this corrupt database is closed while it is repaired Instead a new database is created to allow recordings to continue Why archive a corrupt database Provided the corrupt database has been archived it can often be repaired by the Smart Client So when you open the corrupt database in the Smart Client the Smart Client will repair it automatically if at all possible Tip There are several things you can do to prevent that your databases become corrupt in the first place See Protect recording databases from corruption see About protecting recording databases from corrupti
345. the existing database s The databases of the cameras you selected to be inherited by the new hardware device will be deleted New databases will be created for future recordings but it will not be possible to view recordings from before the hardware replacement o Leave the existing database s The databases of the cameras you selected to be inherited by the new hardware device will not be deleted New databases will be created for future recordings but even though the old databases still exist on the XProtect Professional server it will not be possible to view recordings from before the hardware replacement Should you later want to delete the old databases deletion must take place manually 3 If the new hardware device has fewer video channels than the old hardware device it will not be possible for the new hardware device to inherit all cameras from the old hardware device When that is the case you will be asked what to do with the databases of cameras that could not be inherited by the new hardware device You have two options o Delete the databases for the cameras that are not inherited The databases of the cameras that could not be inherited by the new hardware devices will be deleted It will not be possible to view recordings from before the hardware replacement New databases will of course be created for future recordings by the new hardware devices o Leave the databases for the cameras that are not inherited The databases of
346. the flattened view down Won Moves the flattened view down and to the right METRE Zooms out one zoom level per click D Zooms in one zoom level per click ET PTZ preset positions PTZ related properties are only available when you are dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera PTZ preset positions can be used for making the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular position when particular events occur and when setting up PTZ patrolling profiles Preset positions also become selectable in clients allowing users with required rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 to move the PTZ camera between preset positions Names of preset positions must contain only the characters A Z a z and the digits 0 9 If you import preset positions from cameras see the following verify that their names do not contain other characters If they do change the preset position names before you import them Restart services see Start and stop services on page 184 after having made changes to PTZ settings Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time Therefore we recommended stopping see Start and stop services on page 184 the Recording Server service when configuring such devices for motion detection and PTZ See also View video from cameras in Management Application on page 213 www milestonesys com 115
347. the user s group s ability to use the Smart Client You can use this as a temporary alternative to deleting the user group for example while a user is on vacation Ability to create and edit views in shared groups in the Smart Client Views placed in shared groups can be accessed by every user If a user group does not have this right shared groups will be protected indicated by a padlock icon in the Smart Client 180 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Ability to create and edit views in private groups in the Smart Client Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the user who created them If a user group does not have this right private d groups will be protected indicated by a padlock icon in the Smart Edit private views Client Denying users the right to create their own views may make sense in some cases for example in order to limit bandwidth use For more information about shared and private views see the separate Smart Client documentation Ability to access and work with the Management Application Administrator Access Selected and non editable for Administrators Cleared and selectable for all other users Camera access When you add or edit basic users see Add basic users on page 177 Windows users see Add Windows users on page 177 or groups see Add user groups on page 178 you can specify camera access settings In the list of cameras s
348. ther detection of motion 3 Specify the required number of seconds for the selected option default is ten and five seconds respectively Unless transition time see the previous information under Wait and Transition Timing is set to zero motion detection is automatically disabled while the camera moves between preset positions as irrelevant motion is otherwise likely to be detected while the camera moves between the preset positions Resume PTZ patrolling PTZ patrolling is automatically paused when the camera is operated manually as well as if PTZ on Event is used You can specify how many seconds should pass before the regular patrolling is resumed after a manual or event based interruption Default is 30 seconds Users of the Smart Client are in addition to manual control able to stop a selected PTZ camera s patrolling entirely This takes place through a context menu in the Smart Client view For Smart Client users the number of seconds specified in the Patrolling settings section therefore only applies when users manually control a PTZ camera not when users stop a PTZ camera s patrolling entirely When Smart Client users stop a PTZ camera s patrolling entirely the camera s patrolling will resume only when the Smart Client user selects to resume it PTZ on event PTZ related properties are only available when you are dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera When a PTZ camera supports preset positions see PTZ preset positi
349. tion can be used more than once in a patrol scheme for example if the preset position covers an especially important location Tip By pressing the CTRL button on your keyboard while selecting from the Preset Positions list you can select several or all of list s preset positions in one go 2 Click the button to copy the selected preset positions to the Patrolling list 3 The camera will move between preset positions in the sequence they appear in the Patrolling list starting at the preset position listed first If you want to change the sequence of preset positions in the Preset Positions list select a preset position and use the Lor L1buttons to move the selected preset position up or down in the list The selected preset position is moved one step per click If you later want to remove a preset position from the Patrolling list select the preset position in question and click the L Lbutton www milestonesys com 118 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Wait and transition timing for a patrolling profile Lets you specify the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera should stay at each preset position before it moves on to the next Wait time sec preset position Default is 10 seconds The wait time applies to all presets in the patrolling profile that is the PTZ camera will stay at each preset position for the same number of seconds Transition time sec Lets you speci
350. to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position that is default position Moves the PTZ camera to the right z Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down El Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right Zooms out one zoom level per click x Zooms in one zoom level per click www milestonesys com 83 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Recording and storage properties Properties in this window Recording and archiving Gates 84 Dynamic path selection 00 ccceecccceeeeecceeeeseeeeeeeseceeeseseceeesneeeeeeenseeeeeenees 86 Vide recording ET 87 Manual recording cccceesecceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeseeeeeseseeaeeeseeeeeeeeeneeaeees 92 Frame rate MJPEG A 93 Frame Rate MPEG 96 Audio recording ek 98 Audio selection 00 0 ceeeceeeeeencceeeeteceeeteeeceeeeaececeesaeeeeeenseceeeeneeeeeeetneaeesennnaes 99 Storage information essere 100 Recording and archiving paths When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go Either in order to speed up things or because the properties in question are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to individual cameras All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background can
351. took place from the camera to the surveillance system via e mail A new log file is created for each day the service is used You cannot disable this type of logging Image Import service log files are named according to the structure ImagelmportLog YYYMMDD log for example ImagelmportLog20091 231 log 161 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 These files log information about registered events A new log file is created for each day on which events occur Event log files You cannot disable this type of logging Event log files should be viewed using the Smart Client use the Playback tab s Alerts section These files log Smart Client user activity provided audit logging is enabled A new log file is created for each day with audit logging d enabled and client user activity Audit log files are named according Audit log files to the structure is auditYYYMMDD log for example is audit20091231 log The is prefix is due to the fact that the audit log files are generated by the Image Server service Log locations All log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users folder for the operating system you are using By default they are stored there for seven days Note however that log file locations as well as the number of days to store the logs can be changed as part of the logging configuration Log structures Most log files generated by XProtect Professional use a shar
352. tself or on the box it came in Immervision Enables panomorph RPL number If you at some point want to add additional types of lenses go to File and select Import new lens types Locate the xml file that contains information about the lens type and press OK For details of ImmerVison panomorph lenses and RPLs see http www immervision com en home index php http www immervision com en home index php Select to enable fisheye support Fisheye technology uses a wide angle lens to capture a hemispherical image which can then be de warped through configured fisheye settings see Fisheye on page 113 for the camera in question Enable fisheye support If required enter your special fisheye license key and click OK after License key which it will be possible to configure fisheye settings for camera s attached to the hardware device Do need the special fisheye license key and where do get it Contact your XProtect Professional vendor for further information Fisheye When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras fisheye properties may be available Fisheye is a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic video through an advanced lens You will not see the fisheye properties until certain conditions are met The camera must be either a dedicated fisheye camera or be equipped with a special fisheye lens A special fisheye license ke
353. types of server hardware devices and cameras are used in each shop In such cases you can use an existing configuration typically a cloned configuration see Export and import management application configuration on page 204 as a template for the other installations However since the shops installations are not exactly the same the hardware devices and cameras are of the same type but they are not physically the same and therefore they have different MAC addresses there needs to be an easy way of importing changes to the template configuration This is why XProtect Professional lets you import changes about hardware devices and cameras as comma separated values CSV from a file see CSV file format and requirements on page 52 1 From the menu bar select File Import Changes to Configuration 2 Select Online verification if the new hardware devices and cameras listed in your CSV file are connected to the server and you want to verify that they can be reached 3 Then point to the CSV file and click the Import Configuration from File button Restore system configuration from a restore point Restore points allow you to return to a previous configuration state Each time a configuration change is applied in the Management Application either by clicking OK in a properties dialog or by clicking the Apply button in a summary pane a new restore point is created All restore points in the current and previous five sessio
354. ude Date and Time setting If set to Yes date and time from the camera will be included in video Note however that cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc Camera time and XProtect Professional system time may therefore not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion As all frames are time stamped by XProtect Professional upon reception and exact date and time information for each image is already known it is recommended that the setting is set to No Tip For consistent time synchronization you may if supported by the camera automatically synchronize camera and system time through a time server Video When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 for specific cameras properties include If the camera uses MJPEG video format With MJPEG you can define frame rates for regular as well as speedup modes If the camera offers dual stream you can also enable this www milestonesys com 101 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Professional 8 1 Regular frame rate mode Frame Rate Live Frame Rate Recording Frame Rate Speedup frame rate mode Enable speedup frame rate Frame Rate Live Frame Rate Recording Frame Rate On motion www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Required average frame rate for video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interva
355. und cannot be edited Frame Rate Live Frame Rate Recording Frame Rate www milestonesys com Required average frame rate for video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour Required average frame rate for live video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled the Live Frame Rate column will be read only with the value Dual streaming which cannot be altered Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera Select number of frames then select the time unit interval second minute or hour The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified under normal mode 58 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Lets you select under which conditions video from the camera should be recorded e Always Record whenever the camera is enabled see General on page 100 and scheduled to be online see Online period on page 155 the latter allows for time based recording e Never Never record Live video will be displayed but since no video is kept in the database users will not be able to play back video from the camera e Motion Detection Select this to record video in which motion see Motion detection amp exclude regions on page 110 is detected Unless post recording see the
356. und will VES be played once Time profile When you configure Time profiles see Add a time profile for Alarms on page 194 specify the following Name Type a name for the time profile Description Enter a description optional Right click the calendar and select Add Single Time Specify Start Add Single Time time and End time If the time covers whole days select All day event Right click the calendar and select Add Recurring Time Specify Add Recurring Time the time range recurrence pattern and range of recurrence Right click the calendar and select Edit Time Specify Start time and End time If the time covers whole days select All day event Edit Time When you edit an existing time profile remember that a time profile may contain more than one time period and that time periods may be recurring If you want your time profile to contain additional periods of time add more single times or recurring times MIP plug ins About MIP plug ins If you install MIP Milestone Integration Partner plug ins to your XProtect Professional the plug ins can be found in the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration under MIP Plug ins You can assign MIP related user rights to users and user groups You do this from the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration expand Users right click the wanted user and select Properties Under the Alarm Management tab a tab allo
357. usly exported Management Application configuration The same import method is used regardless of whether the XProtect Professional Management Application configuration was exported as a backup or a clone 1 In the Management Application s File menu select Import Configuration 2 Browse to the location from which you want to import the configuration select the required configuration file and click Open 3 Only relevant if the system into which you import the configuration contains devices cameras etc which are not present in the imported configuration You will be asked whether you want to delete or keep recordings from affected devices If keeping the recordings note that they will not be accessible until you add the affected devices to XProtect Professional again Select the required option and click OK www milestonesys com 205 Backup and restore configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 4 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration and select Services 5 Forthe Recording Server and Image Server services respectively click the Restart button When the two services are restarted the imported Management Application configuration is applied Import changes to configuration It is possible to imported changes to a configuration This can be relevant if installing many similar XProtect Professional systems for example in a chain of shops where the same
358. ve system this can be done in different ways e Windows 7 click the Windows logo and type file sharing in the search results window and press Enter Under File and Printer Sharing make sure that Turn off file and printer sharing is selected Under Public Folder Sharing make sure that Turn off public folder sharing is cleared www milestonesys com 69 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 e Windows Vista click Start gt Control Panel Under Network and Internet select Set up file sharing The Network and Sharing Center window appears Under Sharing and Discovery set the option for file sharing to Off by clicking the down arrow next to File Sharing and select the radio button to Turn off file sharing Click Apply and continue through the warning messages e Windows XP click Start gt My Computer In the My Computer window select Tools and in the top menu select Folder Options A new Folder Options window opens Click on the View tab and scroll down to find Use simple file sharing recommended Clear the box to disable file sharing Click OK Add Windows users the following way 1 Click Add Windows User to open the Select Users or Groups dialog Note that you will only be able to make selections from the local computer even if you click the Locations button 2 n Enter the object names to select enter the required user name s then use the Check Names feature to verify that they are rec
359. ve their cache cleared before a new version of the XProtect Web Client can be used System administrators must ask their XProtect Web Client users to clear out their browser s cache upon upgrade or force this action remotely this action can only be done in Internet Explorer in a domain www milestonesys com 17 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Recording Server Manager The Recording Server service is a vital part of the surveillance system Video streams are only transferred to XProtect Professional while the Recording Server service is running The Recording Server Manager informs you about the state of the Recording Server service It also lets you manage the service In the notification area the system tray the Recording Server Manager s icon indicates whether the Recording Server service is running or not Green indicates running default red indicates not running By right clicking the icon you can open the Management Application start and stop the Recording Server service view log files and view version information A green icon in the notification area indicates that the Recording Server service is running A red icon in the notification area indicates that the Recording Server service has stopped Monitor System Status By right clicking the notification area s Recording Server icon and then selecting Show System Status you get access to the Status window Tip Alternati
360. ved recordings stored on a local or network drive you use the Smart Client playback features to find and view the relevant recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a camera s regular database Exported archives For exported archives for example archives stored on a CD you use the Smart Client See the Smart Client documentation for more information Configure general scheduling and archiving Do the following 1 In the Management Application navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration right click Scheduling and Archiving and select Properties 2 Specify properties as required for Scheduling all cameras on page 152 Scheduling options on page 153 and Archiving 3 XProtect Professional comes with two simple schedule profiles Always on and Always off which cannot be edited or deleted If these do not meet your needs you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera When you create a customized schedule profile for one camera you can reuse it with other cameras if required 4 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar www milestonesys com 149 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 When archiving disable any virus scanning see Virus scanning information on page 24 of camera databases and archiving locations Configure camera specific schedules If you ba
361. vely simply double click the icon to open the Status window The Status window lets you view the status of the image server s and connected cameras The status of each server camera is indicated by a color e Green indicates that the server or camera is running correctly e Gray indicates that the camera not the server is not running Typically a camera will be indicated in gray in the following situations o The camera is not online as defined in the camera s online period schedule see Online period on page 155 o The Recording Server service has been stopped e Red indicates that the server or camera is not running This may because it has been unplugged or due to a network or hardware error Errors are listed in the Recording Server log file Place your mouse pointer over a camera in the status window to view details about the camera in question The information appears as a pop up and updates approximately every 10 seconds Resolution The resolution of the camera The number of frames per second frame rate currently used by FPS the camera The number updates each time the camera has received 50 frames Resolution The resolution of the camera www milestonesys com 18 Introduction Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 The number of frames received from the camera since the Frame count a Recording Server service was last started The number of kilobytes sent the by camera since the
362. ver service established but event cannot be sent most likely due to network problems for example time out Event sent to Event Server but no reply received most likely due to network problems or port being busy see the Event Server log typically located at ProgramData Milestone XProtect Event Server logs can be opened in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool The Event Server service does not know the event most likely due to the event or changes to the event not having been saved Event format is somehow incorrect Most likely your machine is not on the list of allowed IP addresses host names An Event Server error Open the Event Server log in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool The log is typically located at ProgramDataMIilestone Protect Event Server logs Response is invalid Possibly due to port being busy or network problems Open the Event Server log in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool The log is typically located at ProgramDataMlilestone WX Protect Event Server logs Response is valid but not understood Possibly due to port being busy or network problems Open the Event Server log in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool The log is typically located at ProgramDataMIilestone Protect Event Server logs Please contact your system provider Milestone Support support milestonesys com for help When you add hardware input events see Add a hardware input event on page 127 some properties depend on the selected type
363. verview XProtect Professional is the right product for small to mid sized installations that need robust single server surveillance software with the full functionality of advanced management flexible scheduling fast searching and analysis XProtect Professional supports up to 64 simultaneously with the widest choice of network video and computer hardware equipment XProtect Professional consists of a number of components each targeted at specific tasks and user types Management Application Recording Server service Event Server Microsoft SQL Server Express Database Image Server service Download Manager www milestonesys com The main application used by surveillance system administrators for configuring the XProtect Professional surveillance system server upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required for example when adding new cameras or users to the System A vital part of the surveillance system Video streams are only transferred to XProtect Professional while the Recording Server service is running The Recording Server service is automatically installed and runs in the background on the XProtect Professional surveillance system server You can manage the service through the Management Application Handles configuration of alarms and maps from all servers within XProtect XProtect ProfessionalXProtect Professional installations including Master amp Slave setups see Configure master a
364. view Video settings typically let you control bandwidth brightness compression contrast resolution rotation etc www milestonesys com 56 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 All properties on a white background are editable properties on a light blue background cannot be edited Use the list in the left side of the wizard window to select a camera and adjust its video settings Then select the next camera and adjust its settings and so on Video settings are to a large extent camera specific and must therefore be configured individually for each camera Click Open Settings Dialog to configure the camera s settings in a separate dialog When you change video settings they are applied immediately This means that for most cameras you are immediately able to see the effect of your settings in a preview image However it also means that you cannot undo your changes by exiting the wizard For cameras set to use the video formats MPEG or H 264 you are typically able to select which live frame rate to use for the camera Video settings may feature an Include Date and Time setting If set to Yes date and time from the camera will be included in video Note however that cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc Camera time and XProtect Professional system time may therefore not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion As all f
365. w of events Configure scheduling When do you want to archive Do you want some cameras to transfer video to XProtect i Professional at all times and other cameras to transfer video only within specific periods of time or when specific events occur With the scheduling feature you can specify this You can also specify when you want to receive notifications from the system See Configure general scheduling and archiving on page 149 and Configure camera specific schedules on page 79 Configure clients access to XProtect Professional Ls A number of different client applications see About clients is included with XProtect Professional You can specify whether you want clients to access the XProtect Professional server from the internet how many clients you want to be able to connect simultaneously etc see Configure server access on page 171 Configure master slave servers This step is only required if you want to run several XProtect Professional servers together Ls A master slave setup allows you to combine several XProtect Professional servers and thereby extend the number of cameras you can use beyond the maximum allowed number of cameras for a single server In such a setup clients will still have a single point of contact they connect to the master server but also get access transparently to cameras and recordings on the slave servers See Configure master and slave servers on page 174 Configure users E N
366. wing access to MIP settings for the selected user is located You can also use online activation see About activating licenses on page 35 in connection with licensing schemes of MIP related plug ins www milestonesys com 199 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Backup and restore configuration About backup and restore of configurations We recommend that you make regular backups of your XProtect Professional configuration cameras schedules views etc as a disaster recovery measure While it is rare to lose your configuration it can happen under unfortunate circumstances Luckily it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration Back up system configuration The backup described here is a backup of your entire surveillance system setup including among other things log files event and Matrix configuration restore points view groups and Management Application and Smart Client configuration Alternatively you can export your configuration as a backup see Export and import management application configuration on page 204 which is limited to the the Management Application configuration The following describes how to back up your configuration in XProtect Professional 7 0 If you need information about how to back up a configuration from an earlier version of XProtect Professional a typical need when upgrading see Upgrade from a previous version on
367. www milestonesys com 98 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Above examples are simplified The exact available video storage capacity also depends on GOP JPEG and audio kilobyte size Audio selection When you configure video and recording see About video and recording configuration on page 77 you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go Either in order to speed up things or because the properties in question are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to individual cameras With a default microphone and or speaker selected for a camera audio from the microphone and or speaker will automatically be used when video from the camera is viewed Note that all of the properties can also be specified individually for each camera The template can help you configure similar properties quickly Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording path archiving path and retention time for all of them Instead of having Template to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times you can simply enter them once in the template and then apply the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks Select which cameras you want to apply the template for You then Apply Template use one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template Tip To select all cameras in the list click the Select All button The name as it appears in the Management Applic
368. x recipient in the list Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected Matrix recipient You will be prompted to confirm the removal Name for the Matrix recipient Used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one The name will appear in various day to day usage situations it is therefore a good idea to use a descriptive and unambiguous name Names must be unique and must not contain any of these special characters lt gt amp IP address of the Matrix recipient used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the port number to be used when sending commands to the Matrix recipient Used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one The Matrix recipient will listen for commands on this port By default port 12345 is used you can of course specify another port number Specify the password to be used when communicating with the Matrix recipient Used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Select if the Matrix recipient in question is a Smart Client Matrix triggered live video may also be displayed in usersSmart Clients If a Smart Client is used distribution of the Matrix triggered live video takes place slightly differently Removes any content in the Name Address and Password fields Updates the properties of the selected Matrix recipient with the ch
369. xpand Advanced Configuration and expand Cameras and Storage Information right click the required camera and select Properties About database resizing In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected or the available drive space is suddenly reduced in another way an advanced database resizing procedure will automatically take place If archives see About archiving on page 143 are present on the same drive as the camera s database the oldest archive for all cameras archived on that drive will be moved to another drive moving archives is only possible if you use dynamic archiving see Dynamic path selection on page 86 with which you can archive to several different drives or if moving is not possible deleted If no archives are present on the drive containing the camera s database the size of all camera databases on the drive will be reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest recordings temporarily limiting the size of all databases When the Recording Server service see About services on page 183 is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure that the drive size problem is solved Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in the Smart Client in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS notification About motion detection settings Motion detection settings are linked to the Re
370. y is also required you enter the key when you configure the hardware device see Configure hardware devices on page 74 to which the fisheye camera is attached www milestonesys com 113 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 You configure the camera s fisheye functionality by adjusting its fisheye view field indicated by a green circle in the fisheye view until the circle encloses the actual image area of the fisheye lens Your settings are then used by the fisheye technology for converting the circular fisheye view into a flattened rectangular view Ss If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust properties to Ceiling mount reflect this by selecting the check box Resolution values are automatically displayed above the fisheye Resolution image When using fisheye resolution will automatically be set to the highest possible value Controls the horizontal X radius of the green circle Move the slider to the left for a narrower circle or to the right for a wider X radius circle Alternatively specify a value between 0 and 800 in the field next to the slider 0 corresponds to the slider s leftmost position 800 corresponds to the slider s rightmost position A vital part of the surveillance system Video streams are only transferred to XProtect Professional while the Recording Server service is running Milestone Recording Server service Controls the horizontal X p
371. y of the default file paths 1 If you want to change the configuration path stop see Start and stop services on page 184 all services This step is not necessary if you want to change the default recording or archiving path On the Management Application menu bar select Application Settings Default File Paths www milestonesys com 212 Common tasks Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 3 You can now overwrite the necessary paths Alternatively click the browse button next to the field and browse to the location For the default recording path you can only specify a path to a folder on a local drive If you are using a network drive you cannot save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable If you change the default recording or archiving paths and there are existing recordings at the old locations you must select whether you want to move the recordings to the new locations recommended leave them at the old locations or delete them 4 Click OK 5 Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button on the Management Application toolbar 6 Restart see Start and stop services on page 184 all services Monitor storage space usage To view how much storage space you have on your XProtect Professional system and not least how much of it is free do the following 1 In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration a
372. ynamic archiving paths you specify a number of different archiving paths usually across several drives If the path containing the camera database to be archived is on one of the drives you have selected for dynamic archiving XProtect Professional will always try to archive to that drive first If not XProtect Professional automatically archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at any time provided there is not a camera database using that drive This fact will have no impact on how users find and view archived recordings www milestonesys com 144 Advanced configuration Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Dynamic archiving paths are general for all your cameras you cannot configure dynamic archiving paths for individual cameras To configure archiving paths In the Management Application s navigation pane expand Advanced Configuration double click Cameras and Storage Information select Dynamic Path Selection Archives and specify required properties see Dynamic path selection on page 86 If you configure your cameras through the Configure video and recording wizard see The Configure Video and Recording wizard on page 56 the wizard also lets you configure archiving paths About archiving to other locations When you archive to other locations than the default archiving directory XProtect Professional will first temporarily store the archive in the local default archiving direct
373. you add will have access to all cameras including any new cameras added at a later stage You can however specify access settings users and user rights see Configure user and group rights on page 179 separately see Configure server access on page 171 You cannot add users to groups see Add user groups on page 178 through the wizard Pages in this wizard Server access settings sesssssssssssseeeeeeee nennen 69 Basic amp Windows Users sese 69 Configure User Access wizard access summary sss 70 www milestonesys com 68 Wizards Milestone XProtect Administrator s Manual Professional 8 1 Server access settings Name of the XProtect Professional server as it will appear in clients Server name Client users with rights to configure their clients will see the name of the server when they create views in their clients Port number to use for communication between clients and the surveillance server The default port number is 80 you can change the port number if port 80 is used for other purposes in your organization Local port Select required language character set Example If the surveillance server runs a Japanese version of Character encoding Language Windows select Japanese Provided access clients also use a Japanese version of Windows this will ensure that the correct language and character encoding is used in clients communication with the server Sel

Milestone XProtect® Professional 8.1 : Administrator`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Milestone XProtect&reg; Professional 8.1 : Administrator`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Milestone XProtect® Professional 8.1 : Administrator`s Manual